Revit Architecture 2009

Imperial Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM03A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . 159 . 164 . 171 . 177 . 181 . 181 . 184 . 187 . 189 . 192 . 197 . 197 . 201 . 205 . 208

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . 213 . 219 . 223 . 226 . 226 . 231 . 233 . 236 . 238 . 244 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 257 . 260 . 264 . 264 . 266 . 266

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 270 . 274 . 274 . 284 . 286 . 291 . 294 . 295

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . 302 . 309 . 313 . 314 . 317 . 319 . 323 . 324 . 324 . 325 . 327

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 343 . 349 . 349 . 351 . 351 . 355 . 361 . 361 . 363 . 365 . 366 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . 398 . 405 . 409 . 413 . 417

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 418 . 421 . 425 . 430 . 431 . 434 . 436

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 . 438 . 439 . 441 . 443 . 444 . 445 . 446 . 446 . 449 . 450 . 450 . 453 . 453 . 454 . 460 . 460

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 . 465 . 466 . 469 . 472 . 473 . 475 . 477 . 478 . 482 . 484 . 487 . 490 . 497 . 498 . 505 . 509

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 531 . 542 . 544 . 544 . 547 . 550 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 558

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 . 563 . 568 . 571 . 573 . 576 . 578 . 580 . 581 . 584 . 592 . 592 . 594 . 595

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 . 610 . 616 . 618 . 622 . 622 . 624 . 627 . 630 . 630 . 633 . 634 . 637 . 640 . 644 . 646 . 650 . 655

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 . 659 . 667 . 671

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 674 . 674 . 677 . 680 . 680

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 684 . 691 . 695 . 697 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 716 . 719

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 . 724 . 724 . 728 . 732 . 735 . 740

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 . 746 . 756 . 763

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 . 778 . 787 . 790 . 792 . 795 . 795 . 797 . 801 . 802 . 803

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 809 . 811 . 813 . 814 . 817 . 817 . 821 . 823 . 826 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 848 . 849 . 851

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and customize the project as necessary. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the hierarchy of elements. sections. the parameter is one of association or connection. hence. scope. drawing sheets. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. 12 Select default. 13 Click OK. click Training Files. and plans. For most tutorial projects. In this case. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. 2D and 3D view. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You learn the terminology. construction. In this case. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and schedules required for a building project.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.rte. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . quantities. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and click Open. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and open Imperial\Templates. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and residential. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. every drawing sheet. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. you will use the default template. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawings. review the Revit Architecture templates. and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. how to navigate the user interface. schedules. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the operation of the software is parametric. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

and 2D detail components. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and reference planes are datum elements. and roofs are model elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. tags. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. walls and roofs are hosts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. dimensions. They help to describe or document the model. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. filled regions. For example. If you can draw. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Datum elements help to define project context. doors. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.When you change something. They display in relevant views of the model. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. walls. windows. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. levels. and keynotes are annotation elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. programming is not required. For example. and cabinets are model components. For example. grids. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. doors. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. windows. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Understanding the Basics | 7 . dimensions. Examples include detail lines.

schedules. first floor. you can explicitly control them. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Often. To place levels. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls.In Revit Architecture. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. This information includes components used to design the model. and drawings of the design. However. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. section views. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. views of the project. families. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and so forth). Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. top of wall. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . for example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and ceilings. floors. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. The project file contains all information for the building design. Most often. or bottom of foundation. such as roofs. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. By using a single project file. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit Architecture. and types. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. for example. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. from geometry to construction data. In other cases. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.

and similar graphical representation. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. making it easy to understand what each button represents. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. In the steps that follow. For example. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A type can also be a style. System families include walls. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can be a specific size of a family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. the user interface is labeled. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. and levels. However. In the following illustration. For example. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. specifically its clear user interface. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ceilings. identical use.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. System families can be transferred between projects. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. roofs. floors.

By default. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This creates a new project based on the default template. click (New). The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

you type the required key combination to perform the command. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. which are listed on the menu. For example. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. While working in the drawing area. Edit. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. when you add a door. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. For example. a door type is specified. When you select the Door tool. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 9 In the Type Selector.

You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area.

select Views (all). click the tab in the Design Bar.11 Click OK. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. In the Project Browser. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

delete. and group name. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. sheets. and groups. walls. and rename views. reports. family category (doors. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. families. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The browser is dockable. To open a view. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). windows).You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . schedules. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. double-click its name. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

In this case. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Wall." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. Do not click. click Cancel. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After creating a browser organization scheme. The cursor displays as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

20 Press TAB. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. After you are familiar with these tasks. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. press F1 for help. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. When you place the cursor over an element. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. press F1 for context-sensitive help. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can use this tri-pane. Click the Help button. regarding selected elements in a view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. find a keyword on the Index tab. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Windows: From any window. There are several tools that help you find information. In the status bar. In addition. Toolbar: From the toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Tooltips: To see tooltips. If no Help button displays. click on the Standard toolbar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session.18 On the Design Bar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. in conjunction with tooltips. The status bar also provides information. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . There are several ways to access zoom options. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 On the View toolbar. In the drawing area. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view.

11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. on the View toolbar. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. As you move the mouse. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click in the drawing area. . 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button.

and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. expand Floor Plans. and select the wall. as shown. Similar controls. and then using the Zoom tool again. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . called drag controls. referred to as shape handles. to lengthen the wall. moving the wheel to the desired location. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. These are the drag controls. For more information about SteeringWheels. expand Views (all). 15 To exit the wheel. Small blue dots.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 17 Type ZR. and click Help. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. bottoms. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. display along the ends. press ESC. 18 Click and drag the left control. When drawing or modifying a building model. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and click the SteeringWheels tab.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . you want to move the table closer to the wall. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The table moves down. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. such as Move and Copy. In this case. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click (Move).19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and on the Tools toolbar. as shown. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. for example. Some commands.

on the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Some commands. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. select the second item in the list. 24 Select the plant. and drag it on top of the table. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and click again to end it. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 26 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . or press CTRL+Z. In this example. click Lines. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. click the Undo command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify.29 To end the command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

detail. this tutorial uses imperial units only. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. In this tutorial. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. but for training purposes. When you have finished these tutorials. illustrating how building components work together. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. 27 . In Revit Architecture. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Use detail components to define an assembly. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. and annotate building assemblies. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. or referenced as a drafting view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file.

and reference a drafting view.rvt. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a drafting view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click OK. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. import a DWG detail. click Training Files. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. enter Window Head Detail.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. for Name. 3 In the Scale list. create a reference callout. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

In the Project Browser. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 10 In the drawing area. The drawing area is still blank. select Black and White. 6 In the Colors field list.). located directly to the left of the drawing area. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. as shown. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.dwg. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. click Training Files. and click Open. displaying the extents of the detail. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 9 Type ZR. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. The model zooms out.

14 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. and in the Scale list. to activate the view selection list. in the Type Selector.The view displays to the specified area. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 13 Click Reference other view. select Detail View: Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

3 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 On the Options Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. and in the Scale list. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. adjust the detail view display settings. double-click the reference callout tag head. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select Detail View: Detail. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . in the Type Selector. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area.rvt. select Callout. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise.The reference callout is created.

click Modify to clear the selection. 5 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 6 In the drawing area.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. double-click Wall Base 1. enter Wall Base 1. and click OK. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. under Detail Views(Detail). 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 Right-click Detail 0. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select As Underlay.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. right-click. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. under Graphics. and click View Properties. 16 Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Display Model. click (Hide Crop Region). allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. The model elements in the view display as half-tones.

21 Move the cursor up slightly. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. Stud. Directly above the drawing area.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 17 On the View Control Bar. 20 In the drawing area. If the crop region is enlarged. and press ENTER.Brick on Mtl. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . type 1' 6''. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. By grouping detail components. typical details can easily be placed. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. on the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. Model-Based Detailing | 35 .

■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. as shown. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 25 In the Project Browser. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Groups ➤ Detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. and click Create Instance. add the following detail components as shown. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 23 Using the same method.

select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail.28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.

or instructions within a construction documentation package. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and Free End are selected. click Keynote ➤ Element. special notes. 4 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. In the next exercise. click Browse.txt. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. click Training Files. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. in the type selector. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can customize this list. and format keynote styles. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple.rvt. and verify that Horizontal. and under Keynote Table. Leader. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Full Path. map keynotes by material. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For more information about customizing a keynote database. c_express_workshop_details_start. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.

6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. Keynoting | 39 .5 In the drawing area. a question mark displays. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Either move the text inside. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 7 Click to place the leader arm. If no value has been specified. 8 Click to place the tag.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

and click OK. 15 Select 07 21 00. 13 Click to place the tag.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. click Keynote ➤ Material. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the Keynotes dialog.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.

You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Click Check None. Only the keynotes remain selected. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. 17 On the Options Bar. Click OK. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .Boxed. 19 In the Type Selector. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .All items within the selection display in red. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Select Keynote Tags. legends.

Add labels to a title block. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this exercise. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . this tutorial uses imperial units only. Update drawing sheet and project information. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing.rvt. If necessary. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 3 Click OK. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. click Training Files. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . In Revit Architecture. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. or in the element properties of the title block.

you can enter ZE to zoom out. 9 In the Project Browser. Then. 5 In the drawing area. hold down the wheel and drag. roll the wheel. enter Sections/Details. For Name. To zoom in and out. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 7 Enter K. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Click OK. right-click A602 . click Modify to clear the selection. In this tutorial. under Sheets(all). when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel.4 Type ZR.Unnamed. double-click Checker. 6 In the Title Block. enter A602. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Smith and press ENTER. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To pan.

Smith. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 15 In the Options Bar. select Text : 1/8''. 20 Click and type Project Status. (Left) is selected. enter 4/10/2008. enter Design Development. enter J.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. click Text. For Client Name. The Family Editor opens. For Project Status. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 16 Type ZR. For Project Name. 18 On the Options Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. select the title block. 13 Click OK.

25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. under Category Parameters. click Modify to exit the command. 29 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. as shown. click Label.21 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. select Label : 3/16''. add Project Issue Date parameter. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. to add 28 Using the same method. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. as shown. and verify that (Top) are selected. and click. in the Type Selector. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 22 Using the same method. click (Load into Project). 26 In the Edit Label dialog.

to a drawing sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and under Keynote Table.30 In the Reload Family dialog. click Training Files. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . In this exercise.txt. you will create.Project. a viewport displays. place and modify a keynote legend. for Name. and click Yes. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. Next you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. enter Keynote Legend . click Browse. select Override parameter values of existing types. for Full Path. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. representing the view or schedule. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

expand Legends. on the Appearance tab. double-click A601 . as shown.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). clear Show Headers. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details. under Text. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and drag Keynote Legend .

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .Project as shown.

Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Keynote Legend . as shown. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 19 Click OK twice. for Filter. at the bottom of the Filter tab.Sheet. not keynotes. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail). NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. click Edit.Project. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. and click Properties. for View Name. and click OK. under Legends. select Filter by sheet. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. right-click Keynote Legend . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 15 In the Project Browser.

The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. as shown.Title Sheet 1. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. 2 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. under Sheets (all). Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . double-click A0 . and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view remains selected.

The drawing list remains selected. 6 Type ZR. You can specify text attributes for view titles. As part of a construction document set. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture.When you place a view on a sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . define the information to include in a view title. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 3 In the Type Selector. Press ESC to clear the selection. or omit view titles from sheets. by default. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed.

Ceiling Plans. and click OK. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. under Identity Data. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . clear Appears In Drawing List. under Sheets (all). including only sheets that contain views. select A602 .Sections/Details and select A801 . 8 In the Project Browser.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. As you develop the building design. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a central service core. the wall or column will move with it. a curtain wall. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 57 . or “flex the model” by changing parameters. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. For example.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. If the grid moves.

notice four elevation markers. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. 5 Click OK. For this project. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. you use a template that is provided with the software. under Projects. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. After the beginning exercises. such as a door or window. you design inside the elevation markers. with an RVT extension. and residential. In the drawing area in the right pane. construction. 2 In the New Project dialog. and customize the project as necessary. To create the project file. under Create new.rte. The new project opens. click Training Files. but contains no geometry.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. West. select Project. and settings. In views that display elevation markers. The project is stored as a single file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. In practice. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. South. verify that the second option is selected. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. East. and click Browse. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. from the product library. you will use the default template. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. you load any required family type that is not in your project. views. levels. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. click New. 3 Under Template file. Creating the Project In this exercise. and open Imperial\Templates\default.

Families. and Elevations (Building Elevation). notice the Legends. locate the Project Browser. 13 In the file window. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 7 If necessary. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. then expand Floor Plans. reflected ceiling plan views. schedules. 14 For File name. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and duplicate levels. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and families in your project. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and other properties. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). sheets. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. heights.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. such as schedules and legends. display in the south elevation. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Ceiling Plans. created by the template. Schedules/Quantities. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). These views are customizable: you can rename them. Creating the Project | 59 . or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 8 Under Floor Plans. Two level lines. change their properties. and click Training Files. and delete them. Sheets (all). double-click South. expand Views (all). enter Revit Retail Building. as well as change their names. the view you see in the drawing area. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. double-click Imperial. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. duplicate them. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. As you design and document your building model. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Groups. delete. NOTE If you create a project without a template. content and building model reports. 10 In the Project Browser. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. You can add.

You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. expand Views (all). Adding Project Levels on page 60. view the Save reminder interval. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. doors. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the other levels move and change with it. to each other. verify that Project Files (*. and double-click South. and press ENTER. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. enter 00 Foundation. you will want to save your work frequently.rvt) is selected. or constrained. so that when one level moves. You change the names of the 2 default levels. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). You learn how the levels are locked. and on the General tab. When you begin designing.15 For Save as type. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 16 Click Save. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. After you modify the two default levels. and windows within the building model. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

enter -6'. right-click. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 5 In the Project Browser. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. This is the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. enter 01 Entry Level. and then move it up. and press ENTER. not all the tabs are visible. 16 Enter 12'-6''. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. If it does not. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 . Next. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. As you move the cursor. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. enter 0'. and press ENTER. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level. click Level.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ENTER. view the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and click Basics. (You do not have to click to specify the start point.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 14 Click Plan View Types. When you add the new level. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. By default.

20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. right-click Level 3. If you create a level by copying it. you add another level. and for Offset. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click Rename.18 In the Project Browser. Next. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 26 Press ESC. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and move it slightly upward. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 19 Click OK. 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. enter 12'-6''. using a different option. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. under Floor Plans. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. or on the Design Bar. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Level. click (Pick Lines). and rename the corresponding views. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Click to place the level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and enter 02 Level. click Modify to end the command. add 3 levels 12’-6” apart above 03 Level.

31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. If you select a level and click its lock. as shown. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Notice that by moving the top level. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. the levels are no longer constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. all the levels move. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.

Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. click Grid. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . On the Design Bar. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. under Floor Plans. In the following exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. In a later exercise. select (Draw). 3 On the Options Bar. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. click Modify. When the grid is complete. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

and click to place the line. click Grid. Next. and press ENTER. enter 25'. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click (Pick Lines). enter 25'. Enter A. for Offset. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. enter 15'. Click to place the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. for Offset. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.

8 Press ESC. click Grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click (Aligned). On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0'. click Dimension. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 11 On the Design Bar. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15'. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.

click and drag the blue circular grip up. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. If necessary. click Dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. Two pins display on the grid lines. click Modify. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. and press ESC. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select grid lines C and 3. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. ■ Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 22 While pressing CTRL. 24 Press ESC.15 Starting with grid line A. until it is closer to grid line 5. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. until it is closer to grid line A. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. and select grid line A. The pins are hidden. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. By pinning these central grid lines. At the left endpoint of the grid line.

and on the Options Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 33 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select grid line 5. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Name dialog. and click OK. enter 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. 31 For End Segments Length. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click Modify. click . (Element Properties). The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. enter 2''. 35 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 36 On the Design Bar. click the value for Center Segment. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. and select None. 32 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble with Gap.

42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x49. 47 Enter 18'. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click Structural Column. and on the Options Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. click Finish. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. Creating a Column Grid | 69 .37 Select the grid lines again. For Place By. select all of the grid lines. click (Grid Intersection). The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 43 Press ESC. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble. and unlock it. and in the Type Selector. and press ESC. 39 In the Type Selector. 45 While pressing CTRL. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Activate Dimensions. and press ENTER. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select grid line A. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. If it is unlocked. Next. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. select 01 Entry Level. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. lock it. 52 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for From. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. click Camera.48 On the Standard toolbar. and click to place the target point of the camera.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Adding Beams In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. Adding Beams on page 72. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and then copy them to subsequent levels. The current view. and click Rename. displays in bold under 3D Views. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Right-click 3D View 1. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. enter To Building. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. named 3D View 1 by default.

click Beam. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. select each grid line. under Floor Plans. 8 While pressing CTRL.When you finish adding beams. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. view the icons on the View Control Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 6 In the Type Selector. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. Adding Beams | 73 . click (Create Beam On Grid). the icon on the right side of the scale. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. The view is currently set to Coarse. 4 Click Medium. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.

13 On the Design Bar. double-click To Building to view all of the beams.The selected grid lines display as red. 14 Select one of the beams. 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Default 3D View). NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click Select All Instances. Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Finish. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. right-click. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. under 3D Views.

right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. select 06 Roof. 22 On the Options Bar. When you created the columns. and click Element Properties. (Element Properties). under Constraints. and click OK. click 24 Press ESC. 20 Click Cancel. Adding Beams | 75 . 21 With the column selected. All of the columns display as red. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. select 06 Roof. under Instance Parameters. which only extend to the 5th level. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. select 02 Level.17 In the Select Levels dialog. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. view the Top Level parameter. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select All Instances. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. right-click. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 06 Roof. for Top Level.

76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations. Because the Model Graphics Style is Hidden Line and the Detail Level is Coarse. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. and if necessary.25 In the Project Browser. resize the view to see the entire structure. double-click To Building. the structural elements display only as lines. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. under 3D Views. double-click South. NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view.

27 Save the drawing. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces on page 77. 3 On the Options Bar. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 77 . 28 Proceed to the next exercise.

double-click the elevation marker arrow. and press ESC to end the command.4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. The associated framing elevation view displays. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.

NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. click to specify the start point of the brace. but when placed the braces are placed. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level.6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. click Brace. Adding Braces | 79 . The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and when the endpoint snap displays.

add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The height of the roof lowers. enter 59'. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and press ENTER.11 Using the same technique. Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. press ESC twice. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. After you add the final brace.

17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. enter 33'. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. Adding Braces | 81 . double-click 00 Foundation. 14 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER.

NOTE As you add braces. enter 35'. 21 Select grid line A. double-click 00 Foundation. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. click Activate Dimensions. and press ENTER.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 80'. double-click {3D}. under Elevations. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and on the Options Bar. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 19 In the Project Browser. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 26 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.

Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and how to load specific families into a project. under Floor Plans. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 31 Save the drawing. Creating a Foundation on page 83. 28 On the Standard toolbar.Test connectivity of the columns. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click and roof height. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. After you load the pile cap family. lock it. and drag it away from the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. Creating a Foundation | 83 . 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. Before you can add the pile caps. grid size. beams. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and if necessary. double-click 00 Foundation.

and open Imperial\Families\Structural\Foundations\Pile Cap-Rectangular.rfa. 6 Expand Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). and click View Properties. Click OK twice. for Level. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. When the final pile cap is placed. In the Element Properties dialog. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Close the warning dialog. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. In the View Range dialog. select Unlimited. Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. for View Range. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. A warning displays. The pile cap has been added in the view. and click Create Similar. click Edit.2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 7 Select 81'' x 81'' x 36''. under View Depth. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. and expand Structural Foundations. and drag it to the drawing area. press ESC twice. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and press ESC twice. click Training Files. under Extents. expand Families. The foundation pile cap now displays. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it.

and braces that you used to create the building structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .13 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You load new column.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure. you change the types of the columns. beams. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and brace families into the project. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.

select HSS-Hollow Structural Section:HSS8X4X. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. and click Select All Instances. 4 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify.0500. right-click. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar: 1''.625. and click Select All Instances. select HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column:HSS20X. 3 In the Type Selector. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click Brace. The building model displays the round hollow columns. right-click.Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. under 3D Views.

click Modify. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. enter 3''. After the files are linked. The brace type changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Duplicate. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. select Round Bar: 3''. and changing its size parameter. click (Default 3D View). the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Name dialog. for d. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. click Modify. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the Round Bar: 1'' bar type. and click OK twice. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to Round Bar: 3''. under Dimensions. for Type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.This not the size that you want to use. and click OK. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 While pressing CTRL. 16 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. enter 3''. double-click Elevation 1-a. 19 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.

Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. depending on the project.rvt. click Copy.Origin to Origin. Grids. In this case. select the linked Revit model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. After the link is established. under Elevations. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. and walls could also be copy/monitored. and click Open. however. select i_RRB_structure_complete. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. and click Select Link. 4 In the Project Browser. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. double-click South.Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. click (Copy/Monitor). the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 6 In the drawing area. structural members. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Under Positioning. select Auto . it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model.

9 In the drawing area. click OK. select Multiple. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . while pressing CTRL. and click Delete. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click Finish mode. 18 Using the same method. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). delete the Level 2 floor plan. 16 Click OK. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. select Levels 00 through 06. right-click Level 1.8 On the Options Bar. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the New Plan dialog. click Finish. while pressing SHIFT. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. for Floor Plan views.

and click OK. under Floor Plans. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the drawing area. 19 In the Project Browser. select the Topography : Surface. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. right-click. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. right-click. enter Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. for Name. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . First.

click Camera. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.25 In the View Templates dialog. under Names. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 26 In the Project Browser. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plans.

and click OK. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors In this exercise. expand 3D Views. and click Rename. Adding Floors on page 92. 36 In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click 3D View 1. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.35 In the Project Browser. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.

the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it.To create floors. ■ Adding Floors | 93 . and elements in the current view display as gray. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as roofs. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle).rvt. In this exercise. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. click Floor. You are now in the Sketch Editor. select the top floor line. click Training Files. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. double-click 01 Entry Level. Some other Revit Architecture elements. click Dimension. and railings are also created from sketches. past the first vertical grid line. stairs. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Move the cursor to the left. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Leave this dimension unlocked. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors. click Lines. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. If the grid changes size. On the Sketch tab. and then the first horizontal grid line. On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Enter 1'. and then press ESC. Do not lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimension. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select and lock the dimensions. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'. and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left dimension. select the top floor line. At the top left corner of the grid. click Modify. press ENTER. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and change their values to 1'.

The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. They display on the floor sketch. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click (Pick Lines). ■ Adding Floors | 95 . and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Floor. On the Sketch tab. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. double-click 02 Level. click Quit Sketch. and press ESC. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model.7 On the Design Bar. using a different sketching technique. on the Design Bar. enter 5'. 8 Select the floor. Next. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. and for Offset. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. On the Options Bar. click Lines. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.

12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown, and lock the dimensions.

13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level, and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively, you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level, and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.

Adding Floors | 97

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 35 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.

Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar:

Clear Defines slope. Click (Pick Lines).

■ ■

For Offset, enter 6', and press ENTER.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

Adding a Roof | 99

6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

7 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines:
■ ■

On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area, select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101

14 On the Options Bar, click

(Add new points to the slab shape).

15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -4'', and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof, on grid D, move the cursor down below the roof, and click to specify the section.

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section, you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view, select the roof, and on the Options Bar, click 27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Structure [1], select Variable. (Element Properties).

Adding a Roof | 103

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan, select the section line, and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog, click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Add swept fascias

36 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view, zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. In this case, the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector, select Fascia - Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge, moving counter-clockwise, select each edge.

104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 105.

Adding a Curtain Wall
In this exercise, you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid, so if you resize the grid, the curtain wall resizes with it.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 105

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront, and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type, you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog, enter Retail Storefront, and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

(Element Properties).

Under Construction, for Join Condition, select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 7'. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 3’ 6''. Click OK twice.

8 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Level, select 01 Entry Level. For Height, select 05 Roof Garden. For Offset, enter 2'.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.

13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 107

15 On the View Control Bar, verify the view settings:
■ ■

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 108.

Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels, you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None. 5 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Click OK.

Creating an Entrance | 109

7 Zoom in to the entrance area, in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 9 Select 1 panel, press and hold CTRL, and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

10 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

11 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 12 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 13 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK. 14 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 15 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South. 20 Zoom to the front of the building. 21 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

22 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.

23 On the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments. 24 Select the mullion that you selected previously, select another mullion to the right, and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

31 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 32 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and unpin it. click Curtain Grid. select One Segment. select Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. Creating an Entrance | 113 . 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). click Modify. 27 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

35 Zoom in to the first panel. 3rd. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and 4th panels. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. press TAB until it is selected. 39 Optionally. open the North elevation. 34 Zoom in to the front of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and view the new entrance. 37 Press DELETE. 36 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 114. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 38 Using the same process.33 On the View toolbar. select it. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click (Default 3D View). and unpin it.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. for Underlay.rvt. under Graphics. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click View Properties. under Floor Plans. 3 Right-click in the view. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . click Training Files.

which indicates you must draw the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to complete the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. click Callout.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Display Area. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 13 Select the section line. under Floor Plans. as shown. and click Flip Section.9 In the Project Browser. 12 Draw a section line. and click Rename. click Section. and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 14 Press ESC. right-click.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 21 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . right-click Section 1. expand Sections (Building Section). and click Rename. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 17’ x 17’ square wall inside the grid lines.16 Select the section box. 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. For Loc Line. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. Click (Rectangle). 18 In the Rename View dialog. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. select Finish Face: Exterior.5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Section Display Area. click Wall.

26 On the Design Bar. select Compound Ceiling: 2’ x 2’ ACT System. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. for Prefer. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. click (Align). 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. under Ceiling Plans. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. and lock the dimension. 27 On the Options Bar. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser.24 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 Press ESC twice. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. click Ceiling. select Wall faces. click Dimension. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.) Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Lock both alignments.

and click OK. Next. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. double-click Section Display Area. 38 On the View Control Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Sections (Building Section). enter 9'. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties).36 Press ESC twice. for Height Offset From Level. enter 9'. click to select it. Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. click 43 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). for Base Offset. under Constraints. under Ceiling Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify. double-click Section Display Area. 46 Press ESC. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. under Sections. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click OK. and click to select the walls. under Constraints. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 47 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor.48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. Select the 02 Level Floor. and press ESC. and click to select the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and click . under Ceiling Plans. On the Options Bar. under Construction. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . click Edit. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. click Edit/New. for Structure. 49 In the Project Browser. for Top/Base. for Type. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

56 In the Element Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. click (Rotate).54 Click OK.

60 Click. and press ENTER. enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 123 . 61 Press ESC.

67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Optionally. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 125. click Shadows Off. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 64 On the View Control Bar.

click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the left. Move the cursor over grid line B. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . enter 5'. and click to create a reference plane to the right. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair. and for Offset. and copy it to the 05 Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.rvt.

2. and 3. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 Using the same method. shorten the right reference plane. 6 Select the left reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. C. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and specify a point to create first stair flight. click Stairs. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.

select Basic Wall: Generic .8'' Masonry. and specify a point. beyond the end of the stair. with a message that 22 risers have been created and 0 remain. Click (Rectangle). 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. select Finish Face: Interior. Move the cursor down. ■ Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. including its handrails. The complete stair displays. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. click Wall. and select the 2nd reference plane.

16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it. 18 Using the same technique. 15 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. click Align.14 Draw walls around the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.

and press DELETE. and press ENTER. Lock the dimension. Select the interior face of the wall. 21 Select the dimension. click Door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . Click Modify. (Undo). 24 On the Standard toolbar. Select the bottom of the stair. select the dimension value. and specify a point away from the wall. Because the dimension is constrained. The stair and walls move to the left. 25 While pressing CTRL. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. enter 4'.20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 27 In the Type Selector. TIP To flip the door swing. Select the wall. select both reference planes. and press DELETE. for Prefer. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 28 On the Options Bar. 23 Select the stair. a warning displays. clear Tag on Placement. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. select Wall faces. select Single-Flush : 36'' x 84''.

33 Select the stair. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 35 On the View toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. select 00 Foundation. but if you view the top level of the building. click 36 On the View toolbar. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Element Properties). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. click Modify. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. (Default 3D View). select 05 Roof Garden. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Click OK. (SteeringWheels). select all 4 walls. For Top Constraint. for Multistory Top Level. for Base Constraint. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Under Constraints. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK.30 On the Design Bar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignments. 46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click Align. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 44 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. under Floor Plans. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. (Rectangle).38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 131 .

132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 55 In the Project Browser. enter 1'. By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. on the View toolbar.Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. (Default 3D View). select Up to Level: 06 Roof. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. For Top Constraint. (SteeringWheels). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. 56 Select the shaft. click (Default 3D View). click see the roof. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor.

You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 133. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and click View Properties. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. The exact placement is not important. 7 On the Tools toolbar.8'' Masonry. and then select the right face of the wall. under Graphics. select Basic Wall: Generic .rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and click OK. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click (Align). select 06 Roof. click Training Files. click Wall. for Underlay.

and click Open View. click Edit Profile.Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. select Elevation: South. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the error dialog. 11 In the Go To View dialog. enter 32' 6''. click Remove Constraints. and press ENTER. and click (Fillet arc). as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click . select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. click Lines. 20 Draw a circle with a 4' radius just below the fillet arc. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. and click (Circle). 16 On the Design Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click . 14 Select the 12' 6'' vertical dimension value. 18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. as shown: Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 135 .

22 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Finish Sketch. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views.21 On the Design Bar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. as shown. select Planter : 48'' x 48''. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . under Floor Plans. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. double-click 05 Roof Garden. between grid lines C and D. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 137. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Component. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. and open Imperial\i_RRB_host. TIP After you place the 1st planter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.

and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.Deciduous: Japanese Cherry . as shown. enter Japanese Cherry 5'. 17 While pressing CTRL. enter 5'. 6 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Project Browser. and press ESC twice. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component. click Duplicate. under Dimensions. select RPC Tree Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 5'. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select the 2 remaining trees. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 16 Click Apply. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click Edit/New. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube.15'. 14 In the Name dialog. select RPC Tree . for Type. (Element Properties). 8 On the View toolbar. for Height. 11 Select one of the trees. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. View the roof. and then click OK twice.5 On the Basics tab.

The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. under 3D Views. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Floor.18 In the Project Browser. For Offset. click Lines. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 25 Using the same method. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to place the line. double-click {3D}. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 8'. under Floor Plans.

and click to sketch a line. 30 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. for Offset. click (Draw). and click to finish the line. clear Chain. move the cursor to the right approximately 4'. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0'. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. move the cursor up 3'. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.26 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

37 On the Design Bar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. The completed sidewalk displays. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.33 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch. 35 Select the line between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . 34 Select the line that you just drew.

for Type. and on the Options Bar.Next. as shown: (Element Properties). for Height Offset from Level. click 40 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click so he is facing the column. 47 In the Type Selector. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 38 Select the sidewalk. a photorealistic image displays. When you render an image. 41 In the Name dialog. 50 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. select Rotate after placement. select RPC Male: Alex. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. In plan view. enter -0' 6''. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 48 On the Options Bar. 44 Click OK. under Constraints. enter Sidewalk. 49 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 42 Click OK twice. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 45 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. near Column E5. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Component.

you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 52 Move the cursor clockwise. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 55 Press ESC twice. 53 In the Type Selector. select RPC Beetle. 51 In the Type Selector.NOTE If necessary. select RPC Female: Cathy. about 30 degrees. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 143 . and click to place her on the sidewalk. 54 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.

you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 In the camera view (3D View 1). under Elevations. for Offset. Next. click the car. and on the Options Bar. When you select a host for a component. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host.56 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click (Element Properties). enter -1'. 60 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. click Pick Host. click Camera. 59 In the Project Browser. Select a host for the RPC components 61 Select Cathy. under Constraints. and click OK. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. double-click West.

64 Click the sidewalk. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 63 Select Alex. under 3D Views. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. and replace them with a service core. and on the Options Bar. 65 Using the same method. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.62 Click the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. click Pick Host. If the sidewalk changes height. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 145. double-click To Building. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. View the front of the building 66 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.

The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group.rvt. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. including the stairs. walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 3 Select the entire stairwell. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_service_core_. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 147 . click Training Files. click OK.rvt. Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and open Imperial\i_RRB_core. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.4 Press DELETE. 5 On the View toolbar. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. you delete the entire stairwell. click (Default 3D View). click 6 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).

and on the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and zoom in to the linked instance. expand Groups. and click Create Instance. right-click i_RRB_core. 14 In the Project Browser.Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click Modify. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. and notice that the linked file is listed. under Floor Plans. 13 In the drawing area. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. click 16 Align the core: ■ ■ (Align). 11 In the Project Browser. Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. expand Model. under Floor Plans. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.

(SteeringWheels). (Default 3D View).■ ■ Click grid line C. click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. click (top down view). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 18 Select the core. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 149 . or if the group layout is expected to change. 20 On the View toolbar. click Ungroup. and click to align the center.

expand Renderings.rvt. in the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog.22 Proceed to the final exercise. click Training Files. where it is hosted within a railing family. and open Imperial\i_Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. The rendering displays. After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 150. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you add glass railings around the floor edges. 3 In the Conference project. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

and on the Options Bar. The floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans. 5 Expand Railing. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Window menu ➤ i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and select Glass. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click (Split). 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . verify that Chain is not selected. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. 18 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click OK. and expand Railings. click Edit. double-click 02 Level. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. Handrail only. press and hold CTRL. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. click Modify. and click to split the floor. and on the Options Bar. and Parapet. expand Families.

and click the lock to lock the alignment. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to place it. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically 5'. 26 Select grid line D. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click (Align).19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor horizontally to the right 5'. move the cursor vertically until the line is 5' long. and lock the alignment. 25 Select grid line B. click (Align). and click to draw another line.

for Type. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Dimension.rvt project. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. Lock the dimensions. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. enter 4''.29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. For Offset. click Railing Properties. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 153 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Glass. click Railing. 30 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 31 In the Revit dialog.

39 Click Finish Sketch. 154 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 155 . You can view the railing that you just added.

156 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. balconies. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. slight modifications to the building design have been made. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. 157 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. NOTE For training purposes. and a roof garden. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.

158 .

section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. you learn how to create views from a building model. elevation. how to create section and elevation views. 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicating Plan Views | 161 . and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Level 2. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Next. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Duplicating Plan Views | 163 . and click 1''= 80'-0''.14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Elevation. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select 1/8''=1'-0''. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. and click OK. click Section. and double-click Level 1. double-click South East. select Section: Building Section. 14 In the Type Selector. for Scale. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 167 . select 1/8''=1'-0''. ■ Move the cursor down. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 169 .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. expand Sections (Building Section).

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 171 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. click Modify.

double-click Level 1.rvt.Resulting callout view . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. click Callout. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1/4"=1'-0''. select Floor Plan. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Creating Callout Views | 173 . and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 175 . under Sections (Building Sections). select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. for Scale. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

enter Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 177 . Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

select Section Head . Section Tail – Filled. select Custom-Section Head. and can be applied to the section line. enter Section Head – Custom. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK twice. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. select the current project.rfa. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click Open.Custom. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Section Tail . select the section line. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Filled. click Duplicate. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. clear any others. . 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. 10 On the floor plan. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Section Head. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK.rvt.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog.

and click Open. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Custom-Callout Head. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 179 . For Dimensions ➤ Width. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and on the Options Bar. enter 3/4'' Circle. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. select 3. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. click Duplicate. and select 2.rfa. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. For Line Weight. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 17 Under Category. On the floor plan.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter 3/4''. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. select Circle. . for Elevation Tag. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under Category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and select 3. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll to Section Marks. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. scroll to Section Line. 19 Click OK. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. select 3/4'' Circle.

34 In the Name dialog. 39 Click OK twice. select the current project. select the callout. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Duplicate. 43 Under Category. and on the Options Bar. scroll down to Callout Boundary. . and click OK. For Corner Radius. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK.30 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Edit/New. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Load into Project. 40 Press ESC. and select 7. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 1/4''. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. clear all others. and click OK. 36 In the drawing. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.

masking regions.rvt. view regions. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. You learn to create view templates. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 181 . and visual overrides. To accomplish this. 46 Under Category. click Training Files. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Dash. expand Callout Boundary. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and select 4. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 49 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.45 For Line Pattern. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Creating a View Template In this exercise. filters. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.

and double-click East. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 4 On the View Control Bar. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. click Zoom to Fit. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View Toolbar. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. The crop region displays as red. click (Hide Crop Region). under Elevations.

14 In the New View Template dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. elevation markers. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control bar. 16 In the Project Browser. levels. right-click East. Callouts. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 15 In the View Templates dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view. grids. under Elevations. click OK. and click Create View Template From View. and click OK. Creating a View Template | 183 . enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. double-click North.10 Under Visibility.

select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 19 Using the same method. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. click Apply. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. edit the crop region as before.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and click Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. double-click Penthouse. right-click North. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.rvt. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

for Bottom. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 185 . select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. right-click. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. select Penthouse. click Edit. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.2 In the Project Browser.

click Plan Region. click Edit. select Level 4. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for View Range. select Level 4. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Lines. Under View Depth. 10 On the Design Bar.6 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Roof Plan. right-click. and click Properties.

you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. for Bottom. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. click Edit. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. for Level. In the left corner of the building. for View Range. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. select Unlimited. click Region Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. Under View Depth. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 187 . click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Modify.11 On the Options Bar. under Extents. Click OK twice. in this case.

4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. for Rated Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 9 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. under Categories. expand Floor Plans. select Fire Rating. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Select contains. click the Filters tab. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. After you apply the filter. click (New). for Color. 10 On the Filter tab. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Filters. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.rating of the walls. 12 On the Filter tab. under Basic colors. select Solid Fill. and click OK. click Edit/New. and double-click Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click <No Override>. select Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Using the same method. Enter Hr. under Views (all). 11 Select Rated Walls. for Pattern. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click Add. under Projection/Surface. select the red color. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. and apply a color. and click OK. and click OK. 16 Click OK. 5 In the Filters dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns.

click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking Portions of a View | 189 . you obscure geometry in portions of a view. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Remove. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. To accomplish this. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog.

enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.rvt. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. and click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. as shown. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Rename. click Show Crop Region. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. under Floor Plans.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click.

9 On the View Control Bar. click (Rectangle). click Masking Region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 191 . 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the crop region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click Unit 18 Plan . NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. under Floor Plans.Level 1.

right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. right-click. select Solid fill. click the current scale. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. for Pattern. and click Override. under Visibility. Working with Visual Overrides | 193 . and click OK. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. click black. and click OK.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Walls. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click 1/4''=1'0''. and click Rename. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Under Cut. for Color. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Pattern Overrides.

clear Floors. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. click Modify. 18 Right-click. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

Working with Visual Overrides | 195 . under Lines. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 25 Click OK twice. 20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash 1/16''.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. click a purple color. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override.

30 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click By Category Override.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. click . 28 For Color. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. select the sofa. select a bright green color. click Projection Lines.

32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 33 On the View Control Bar. right-click. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 197 . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. click . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

click Sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.rvt. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click View. right-click.

Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights. enter A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter Site Plan.Unnamed. and select the title block. on the Options Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). For Sheet Number. expand Sheets (all). Creating Drawing Sheets | 199 . Click OK. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. click Modify. click Modify.

for Project Address. click Edit. For Project Name. enter 15 May. 14 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. MA 12345 12 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 2009. For Client Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter Freighthouse Flats. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter J. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. Smith. under Other. For Project Number. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2009-1. enter For Approval.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.

Elevations A106 . and click Rename.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Sections A108 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you add views to these sheets.rvt. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A105 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Layout Plan A104 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. and click Save. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Elevations A107 . and click OK. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. Adding Views to Sheets | 201 . enter Floor Plan. for Name. select the new sheet name.Stairs In the following exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 17 In the Project Browser.

and click to place it.Elevations. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click A102 .Floor Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. under Sheets (all).Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. and click to place the view. double-click A104 . under Sheets (all). 4 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays.

Adding Views to Sheets | 203 . under Sheets (all).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . 12 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it.Sections. click Modify.

select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. . and on the Options Bar. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights.Stairs. 16 Select title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. and click OK. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. under Sheets (all). Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. double-click A108 . for View Scale. zoom in to the grip. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar.

and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and then make changes and deactivate the view. under Floor Plans. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. In order to do this. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 205 . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. right-click. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the Design Bar. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER.rvt. and click Activate View. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. under Sheets (all). 2 Select the building section view. double-click A107 .Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 54'. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 207 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click.

enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. enter T. and click Properties. 208 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name.rvt. under Floor Plans. After you create the sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. The camera view displays. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. You modify the view to hide the view title. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. click Camera.

Click OK. select Far Clip Active. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Target Elevation. enter 420'. Under Camera. enter 60'. 12 On the View Control Bar. Under Extents. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 209 . click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 5'.8 On the Options Bar. for Eye Elevation.

on the Options Bar. enter 25''. 15 With the view selected. for Height.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 210 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Scale (locked proportions). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Size. Under Model Crop Size. Click Apply.13 In the Project Browser. double-click T . and then click OK. 14 Under 3D Views.

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Show title. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 211 . under Graphics. select No. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Edit/New. click Modify. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. and click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. . and on the Options Bar. 24 Click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Duplicate. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and close the exercise file.

212 .

you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 213 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. such as doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. such as room and window schedules. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.rvt. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Level 1. Because of the open style floor plan. You also learn to create different types of schedules. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Room Separation. as shown: 5 Using the same method. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Room and Area.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.

click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 215 . click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog.

17 Zoom in on the tag number. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. type 8'. and press ENTER.rfa. 216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. verify that Tag on placement is selected. type U18-1. click it. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and click to place the room and tag. 14 For Offset. and select the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Room. indicating that it can be edited. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

22 Click the room text label. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 217 . Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. ■ 21 On the Design Bar.18 Click the room text label. Dining. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. click Modify. click Room. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. Sequential letters are also supported. type Kitchen. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Entry.

Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. but they need to be tagged. The rooms are already placed. clear Room Separation. under Floor Plans.Level 2. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click Room Tag. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab. 27 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Modify. expand Lines.

Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. in the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. you learn how to place door and window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 219 . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. clear Leader.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Mark. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. type U18-1. type U18-2. under Identify Data. click Properties). and click OK.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tagging Doors and Windows | 221 . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

and click OK. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser.rfa. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 15 Under Category. 222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Tags dialog. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. expand Floor Plans. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged.Level 2. and click OK. select Door Tags. verify that All objects in current view is selected. click Training Files. 13 On the Design Bar. click OK. and double-click Level 1. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 In the Tags dialog.

and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. select the edge to which the leader connects. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 28 Using the same method. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. select Leader. double-click Level 2.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select a dining room chair. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Save the file. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. Tagging Other Objects | 223 . tag all untagged windows. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt. and modify the tag placement and display.rfa. click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Training Files. 26 Under Floor Plans. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category.

and drag it up to form an angled leader. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it above the chair tag. 11 Select the tag for the table. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 9 Click Modify. 224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 Click Modify.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally. 12 Click the elbow control. clear Leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1).

16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar.Level 2. Tagging Other Objects | 225 . Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and on the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. select Furniture Tag : Standard.

22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. select Furniture Tags. 226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Modify. 21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). 23 Save the file.20 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Window Schedule | 227 . Next. in which windows are listed by window type. that is. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Finally. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

9 Click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt. select Windows. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. expand Floor Plans. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 4 For Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Comments and click Add. under Category. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. 7 Using the same method. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Available fields. type Building Window Schedule. and click View.

click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. right-click the schedule. this can be a time-consuming process. However. and on the Options Bar. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. and click View Properties. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 229 . click Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. If no open view shows the selected element. click Close. you are prompted to open one that does. NOTE By clicking Show. in large building models with many views. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark.

The window type schedule is displayed. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. and press ENTER. under Other. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. sorted by type mark. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The window schedule is displayed. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. 23 Click OK twice. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A.15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. under Other. clear Itemize every instance.

and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. expand Schedules/Quantities. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. jamb. and sill conditions for a window can be found.rvt. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 231 . and double-click Building Window Schedule. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In this case. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. unlike shared parameters.rvt. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. double-click Level 2. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. under Floor Plans. you cannot use them to tag objects.

The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. for Fields. type Head Detail. select the following fields. 12 Click OK twice. right-click Building Window Schedule. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. click Add to create the new parameter. click Edit. 5 Click OK. so that they are listed before Comments. click OK.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Group parameter under. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. under Available fields. under Other. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Construction. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Select Type. 6 Using the same method. for Name. Under Parameter Data.

you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit.Door Schedule. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. TIP To select all 3 headers. type 1/A107. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click in the Head Detail header. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. and Sill Detail. select Head Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. You then hide the column used for the filter. and for Sill Detail. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Head Detail. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. For example.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. for Jamb Detail. type Unit 18 .rvt. type 3/A107. type Window Details. Jamb Detail. type 2/A107.Level 1. 17 Save the file. under Type Mark A. and without releasing the left mouse button. select Doors. Under Name. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Group. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 233 .

Select contains in the second field. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Unit 18. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with.■ For Phase. select Family and Type. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 6 Under Available fields. select Hidden field. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Type U18 in the third field. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. 4 Click OK. and double-click A102 . 11 Under Field formatting. select the following fields. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. click the Fields tab. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. but is not included as a column in the schedule. and click OK. verify that New Construction is selected. 10 Under Fields.

The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. click Modify. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 235 . click Modify.13 In the Project Browser. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar.Door Schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and drag it to the sheet. click Unit 18 .

The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. under Available fields. under Floor Plans.20 Save the file. 5 Using the same method. 7 Under Text. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. and click View. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 Click OK.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click Add. to the right of Header text. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Bold. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Number. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click OK. double-click Level 1. under Category. select Rooms. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise.

11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. For 105.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. type Stair. type Storage. type Corridor. for room 101. select Storage. next to Rows. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. For 104. for Name. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. Creating a Room Schedule | 237 . and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 102. type Building Entry. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 106. 101-106. and press ENTER. click New. The room Number is U17-46. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 103. select Corridor.

and modify room names. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Lines field. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. Under Custom colors. under Floor Plans. In the Lines field. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the bright green swatch. 4 Click OK twice. place rooms from a program list. expand Lines. click Room Separation. click Override. under Visibility. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. and click OK. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Line Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select 9. double-click Level 1. First. click the Color field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. draw the horizontal line. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.13 Save the file. under Projection/Surface. you add room separation lines. For Weight.

9 On the Design Bar. click Room.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 239 .

240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 8'. 13 On the Options Bar. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset.

under Schedules/Quantities. place the following rooms. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). under Floor Plans. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 17 On the Design Bar. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 241 . double-click Room Schedule. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Modify.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 20 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. and zoom in to the Corridor.

Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click New. under Category. 27 Select Schedule keys. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 31 For Key Name. clear Room Bounding. 30 On the Options Bar. and for all 3 finishes. while pressing CTRL. under Available fields. select Rooms. and click OK. Floor Finish.21 On the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 23 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and Wall Finish. under Constraints. 24 Open the Room Schedule. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. for Rows. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. type As Selected. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. type Units. and click Add.

click Check None. click (Element Properties). and click Add. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 243 . and click OK. double-click Level 1. click (Filter Selection). add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Other. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. for Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. 44 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 43 In the Filter dialog. select Rooms. for Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. 36 Click OK twice. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog.32 Using the same method. for Fields. 37 Open the Room Schedule. select Units. and click Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Style. select Units. 38 Under U17-8. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for Available fields.

for Color. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 48 Save the file. click OK. select Public. click OK. click the Color Scheme field. select Room Style. right-click Level 1. for Name. and click OK. (Duplicate). 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. For rooms 102 and 105. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 104. under Graphics. select Service. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. type Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 103. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click 5 For Title. at the warning prompt. and click Properties.46 Open the Room Schedule. and double-click Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and 106. type Room Type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 14 Click OK twice. 19 On the Options Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. and clear Room Separation. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Visibility. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. under Schemes. expand Lines. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . click Modify. click Color Scheme Legend. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit. clear Visible. and click OK. click the value in the Color column. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Room Type.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click Modify. type 1''. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. for Swatch Width. and click OK. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. click Edit/New. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Custom color. for Size. 30 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. select blue. and select Show Title. 24 Click OK. respectively.22 In the Color dialog. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. type 1/4''. 23 Using the same method. (Element Properties). 29 Click OK twice. 28 Under Title Text.

click Edit. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Graphics. and select Properties. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Room Type. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 247 . under Sections. double-click Building Section. 35 Click OK twice. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. right-click Building Section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. under Sections. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Visibility. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. for Color Scheme.

click .40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Rooms. 41 On the Options Bar. select Units. for Room Style. 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. select Public. click Check None. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . under Identity Data.

54 While pressing CTRL. click New. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click . type Suites. under Identity Data. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. excluding the stairwell spaces. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 On the Options Bar.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Key Name for the new row. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. for Room Style. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 249 . for Rows. select Service.

Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. select Suites. under Identity Data.55 Click . but not beyond it. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. verify that At wall finish is selected. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Volume Computations. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. for Room Style. and click OK. The color fill extends to the roof. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.

Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. select the stairwell room. type 0’ 0” . click Modify. 71 Click OK. and the living room. for Upper Limit. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 2. under Constraints. . for Upper Limit. 66 Click OK. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 67 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 68 Click . the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. type -10”. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 251 . under Constraints. 70 For Limit Offset.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. double-click {3D}. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file.rvt.

under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Add. and click OK. Clear Itemize every instance.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Creating a Material Takeoff | 253 . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.EPDM. select Roofs. click Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. select Material: Description. Select Grand totals. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. select Family and Type. under Category.Insulation on Plywood Deck . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 3 While pressing CTRL. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Modify. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .

25 4. and click Properties. select Material: Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals.50 1. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). click the Formatting tab. for Material: Cost. under Available fields.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Calculate totals. and under Fields. and click Add. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click Estimated Cost. for Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. 17 Click Calculated Value. type Estimated Cost. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Area. click Edit. and click OK twice. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 23 For Field formatting. Under Field formatting. for Name. 21 Click OK. select Currency. 19 For Type. 20 For Formula.75 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. under Other.

and schedule the total distance of each path. click the Format value. you create a shared parameter file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. tag the line. 26 In the Project Units dialog. for Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 255 . 29 Select Use digit grouping. 31 Save the file. In this lesson. The cost fields are formatted correctly. for Currency. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. can be used for any number-based parameter. Digit grouping.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . 27 In the Format dialog. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. which inserts commas after every three digits. 30 Click OK twice. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. ensuring consistency across families and projects. You draw a travel path line. select $. not just for currency. 28 For Unit symbol. creating a generic tag to tag the family. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. adding the shared parameters to a family. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you create an exiting plan for the building.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. regardless of category. and reporting the shared parameters. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. either within family components or within the project template. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file.

for Name. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 9 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 7 Under Parameters. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups. and click Save. for Name. for Type of Parameter. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type Path ID. for File name. click New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click New. under Floor Plans. 11 Click OK twice.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and click OK. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. type Exiting. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.txt. type Travel Distance. for Name. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click New. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Length. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

and click Select. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Length. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. under Parameter Type.rvt. 15 If necessary. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rfa. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects. in the Load into Projects dialog. group it under Dimensions. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 10 Using the same method. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 11 Click OK. under Parameters. select Shared parameter. click Add. Click Training Files. under Parameter Data. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Family Types.rvt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. and select Instance. click Add. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 257 . under Dimensions. 8 Select Instance. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If you have multiple projects open. 12 In the Family Types dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 13 Click Apply. for Group parameter under. 14 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and click OK. for Travel Distance Formula. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.

23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label.rft. click (Add Parameter). 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. and click OK. click Select. under Parameters. under Category Parameters. 24 Click OK twice. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click parameter(s) to label). 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

rvt is selected. click Modify. select Path ID. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 259 . and click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. for File Name. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type Travel Distance Tag. 35 Save the file. click Load into Projects. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 29 In the drawing window. and click Save. and move it down. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.28 On the Design Bar.rfa. 32 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and press DELETE.

and click in the center of the corridor. 4 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placing. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . above the exterior door as shown. under Floor Plans. select Chain.Level 1. 6 Move the cursor to the right. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. After the lines are tagged.Tagging. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.rvt. click Component. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing.7 Move the cursor down. through the door. and click OK. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. move the cursor near the right corner. 8 On the Design Bar. for Path ID. click Tag ➤ By Category. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1-1. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.Level 2. click Component. select the 2 dashed travel lines. under Constraints.Tagging. and click outside of the building. double click Exiting Plan . clear Leader. and click (Element Properties). 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 261 .

23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. 262 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click above the door to the stair. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click. move the cursor to the left. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. type Level 1 Exit Distance. . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 263 . for Path ID. 30 Using the same method. click Tag ➤ By Category. 33 For Name. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.Tagging. Placing. under Constraints. click Modify. and click OK. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. 28 While pressing CTRL.24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. type 2-1. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.

44 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. 50 Save the file. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select Path ID. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. type 1-. select contains. 35 Click the Filter tab. in the third field. under Other. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. type Level 2 Exit Distance. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. click Edit. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. for Filter. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in the second field. 49 Click OK twice. 43 In the Project Browser.rvt. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. type 2-. while pressing CTRL. 264 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. select Path ID. and click Add. and click Rename. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 40 Click the Formatting tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. and under Field formatting. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 42 Click OK.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. click Training Files. for Filter by. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and in the third field. 38 For Sort by. in the first field.

Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 9 Click OK twice. right-click Generic .Fixed Partitions. under Categories. and click Properties.6''. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . select Walls.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Identity Data.Partitions . and click View.Interiors ➤ C10 . 4 Under Available fields. 10 In the schedule.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Value field. select the following fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 265 . and click . right-click the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. and select C1010145 . and click OK. expand C . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. for Assembly Code.

you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. and click Next. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. under Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. the database display may be different than that shown. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb). NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. type Revit_Project.rvt. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 266 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 9 Under Directories. click the File Data Source tab.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click OK to create the database. 1 On the File menu. click Create. for Database Name. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.mdb. 8 In the New Database dialog. select a location for the database file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. 13 Close the exercise file. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. For example. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. in addition to the Id column. Additionally. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 267 . The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

268 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 269 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. 270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. select Shared. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared.Shared Elevation. click Edit/New. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In the Name dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. expand Views (all). Under Constraints. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. 6 Click OK twice. However. type 1/4'' Head . so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. The levels in the project are not shared. If you did that now. and double-click South. Relocating a Project | 271 . for Elevation Base. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click (Element Properties). 3 On the Options Bar.

The south elevation is displayed. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. 13 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. By typing 325' in this step. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. and press ENTER. 10 On the View menu. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. you specify the new location of the project. click Modify.By selecting the Level 1 line. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. type 325'. select Level : 1/4'' Head . 12 In the Type Selector. 272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .Shared Elevation. The base elevation now reads 325'.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. select Levels 2-4. and the Roof Plan level. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. as well as other views of the building model. the Penthouse level.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 273 . under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North.

and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. You place linear. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. 274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify. Dimensioning In this lesson. permanent dimensions are created automatically. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. click File menu ➤ Save As. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. select Level : 1/4'' Head . you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Dimensioning on page 274. and angular dimensions. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. On the Design Bar. 16 If you want to save your changes.■ ■ In the Type Selector. multi-segmented. In this case. radial. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. In Revit Architecture.Shared Elevation.

and double-click Level 1. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. By default. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. dimensions are aligned.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Dimensions | 275 . click Dimension. snap to wall centerlines. expand Views (all). and are created by selecting individual reference points. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.

5 Move the cursor above the view.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. select it.

9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. and select it. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Creating Dimensions | 277 . and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. The lock displays as locked. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

above the plan view of the building.11 Using the same method. and select its left exterior face. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. but below the first dimension that you placed. 278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select the right endpoint of the planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select the right side of the curtain wall. for Prefer. 12 On the Options Bar. 16 Move the cursor up. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.

and click OK.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. Creating Dimensions | 279 . enter Linear . 25 In the Name dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. click Edit/New. under Graphics. enter Linear . . click Modify. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. 18 On the Basics tab. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog.3/32" Arial .Baseline. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and click OK.Ordinate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select Ordinate. select Baseline. for Dimension String Type. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. for Dimension String Type. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.

verify that Use Actual Value is selected. 30 In the Type Selector. select Linear . 34 Click OK.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. enter Planter. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. .29 Select the dimension string. for Below. 280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . for example Text dialog displays.3/32" Arial . below. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. and in the Type Selector. to the left. select Linear . 33 Under Text Fields.Baseline. under Dimension Value.

35 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. and select it. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 281 . 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select Wall faces. For Prefer. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 37 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.. 282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . type Typ. 46 On the Basics tab. and click OK. click the dimension text.42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. for Suffix. 44 With the dimension still selected.

This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. For Prefer. verify that Wall faces is selected. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click Dimension. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. Creating Dimensions | 283 . 50 Select the horizontal line.

rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 53 On the Basics tab. you select only the wall. 284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Modify. and double-click Level 3.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. When you dimension the wall. expand Floor Plans. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click to place the dimension. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 284. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 285 . select Openings. click Dimension. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. and click to place the automatic dimension string. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. select Entire Walls. Click Options. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Click OK. For Pick. and select Widths. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Wall centerlines.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. When you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension. in some cases. However.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser.7 On the Basics tab. For example. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. and double-click Level 1. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. Controlling Witness Lines on page 286.

4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. and select it. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. For Pick. verify Wall centerlines is selected. click Dimension.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Controlling Witness Lines | 287 .

and select it. 10 Using the same method. select the bottom right endpoint. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. move the cursor down. select the right edge of the planter.7 Using the same method.

13 On the Options Bar. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Dimension.11 Move the cursor down. select it. select Wall centerlines. Controlling Witness Lines | 289 . Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. for Prefer.

click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and drag the dimension down the wall. 18 While pressing SHIFT. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 19 Release SHIFT.

and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.20 Click the blue middle grip. drag it to the right. 22 On the Basics tab. and using the same methods. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 291. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. click Modify. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 291 . and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. After you create the new family type. you change the dimension tick mark.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Tick Mark. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. type Office Standard. and click OK. 2 Click (Element Properties). 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 5 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. select Arrow 30 Degree. and select the lower dimension. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics.

9 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. ■ Click OK twice.■ ■ Under Text. and select the bottom dimension. 10 On the Basics tab. for Text Size. type 1/8”. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 293 . click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. For Text Font. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab. select another font. select CityBlueprint. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list.

and modify it to use the office standard parameters. 294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . create a new angular dimension type. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. Creating Text Annotation on page 294. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes. select the angular dimension on the planter. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.

click (None). 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click and drag to create a text box. click Text. for Leader. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.

7 Select the text box. under Graphics. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. select Arc Leaders. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Text Size. and click . If so. type EXISTING BUILDING. 11 Under Text.5 In the text box. click Edit/New. click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. type 1/4''. and click OK. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. 296 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. and type Planting Bed. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). click Text. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 297 . 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).

and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Click Rename. for Text Font. In the Rename dialog. select CityBlueprint. click Edit/New. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Under Text. and click OK. for New. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Under Graphics. 298 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 20 On the Design Bar. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. type Standard Notes. Click OK twice. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. click Modify. for Leader Arrowhead.

over the Planting Bed text. and type 18'' Conc. 26 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click Text. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. 31 Click in the text box. click (Arc). Wall. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 299 .Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. for Leader. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 300 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As.32 If you want to save your changes.

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In order to detail from the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. 301 . add detail components. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. These components display at the required scale. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. In the callout view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. plywood. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. like a standard door header condition. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.

double-click the detail callout head. 5 In the alert dialog. You load detail components. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component.rvt. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. After you add components. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. The roof overhang detail displays. and click Open.Detailing the View In this exercise. 7 In the drawing area. and insulation objects. as well as detail lines. select As underlay. region objects. click Training Files. you detail the view of the roof edge. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Yes to load a Detail Items family. They are also view specific. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click Training Files. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. which means that all detail components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important. click Detail Component.

Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail.8 Delete the component. Detailing the View | 303 . click Edit/New. enter 1' 4". for Pattern ➤ Detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 17 In the drawing area. 13 In the Name dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Duplicate. click (Element Properties). 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. and click OK. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. select Corrugated Metal. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 16 Click OK twice. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

24 In the Type Selector. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Open. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click (Move). Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. and on the Edit toolbar.rfa. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. click Training Files.19 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component. click Modify. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. ■ ■ Click Modify. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. click OK. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click Training Files. you load them as a group from a single file. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6.Because you still have several components to load. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 305 .rvt. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8".

Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 42 Click Modify. (Move). 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 307 . as shown. enter 5 1/2". and on the Edit toolbar. select to near side. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. For Offset. click Insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation.

■ Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 45 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. click Detail Component. as shown. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. select Thin Lines. 4 Click Modify. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. they are view specific.rvt. and press ENTER. you add lines to your detail. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Like detail components. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines on page 309. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines.52 Proceed to the next exercise. For Offset. enter 1/4". Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 309 . meaning they display only in this view.

and clear Chain. click Detail Lines.10 On the Design Bar. click (Draw). and press ENTER. enter 1/4". 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. For Offset. select Medium Lines. and draw the detail lines as shown. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component.

What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Adding Detail Lines | 311 . for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select Thin Lines.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and click OK. When you turn the display model off. right-click. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 18 In the Type Selector. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Do not display. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 22 In the Project Browser. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. draw the detail lines as shown. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar.

29 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. click Detail Component. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select Vapor Barrier. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. For Offset. 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. select Break Line. enter 1/2". click Detail Lines.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

click Text. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.32 Click Modify. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Dimension. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes on page 313. Adding Text Notes | 313 . Enter the text. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. you add text notes to complete the detail. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

(Filter Selection). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Select All Instances. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click the dimension text. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click..7 Click Modify. and click OK. and click Rename. and click OK. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. for Suffix.rvt. on the Options Bar. Creating Detail Components on page 314. select a text note. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Roof Overhang Detail. and press DELETE. and click OK. 8 Select the dimension line. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Typ.Keynotes. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click. and save the exercise file. under Text Fields.

7 Click Modify. and click Open. while pressing CTRL. 14 Click Modify. click Training Files. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. in the Type Selector. select all the coping linework. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. select Medium Lines.rft. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 315 . and selecting the chain. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.

clear Detail Items. 31 Using the same method used previously. 24 On the Options Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. double-click it in the Project Browser.Keynotes view is not the open view. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Load. for File name. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.rfa. and the component can be placed in the detail. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click Modify. delete the underlying linework. and click OK. click Detail Component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 30 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . Adding Keynotes on page 317. While pressing SHIFT. The original linework remains selected. 26 Press DELETE. enter Roof Edge. 21 To place the component. click Load into Projects. 23 Using a window. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. select the coping. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 On the Design Bar. and click Open.

Click to place the leader arm. use keynote 07645. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. 3/4" Plywood. Roof Edge4. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.rvt. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. Adding Keynotes | 317 . 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. For the metal coping. click Keynote ➤ Element.B5. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you place keynotes on objects.D11. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 2 In the alert dialog. In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. use keynote 06160. and click OK. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.C1. click Training Files.

For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times.G1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 319. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. 17 Keynote the component.F1. select Corrugated Metal. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. 12 On the Design Bar.D1. For the 2x12.D11. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. click in the Value column. and click . and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For the 2x6. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 2x8. use keynote 06110. FasciaProfile_1.A8. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.20 Ga. use keynote 09250.6 Click Modify. click Edit/New.F1. You do this in order to keynote the component. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06160. 18 Save the file. navigate to 07645. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 7/8" Corrugated Steel .I1. using keynote 07460.

rft. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 319 . click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 11 Press DELETE. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 9 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Name dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click Save. select the left end point of the reference line. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. and click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the right end point. 16 Select the component. select Medium Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. 8 In the Save As dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click (Element Properties). 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. click Lines. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Detail Component.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 5 In the drawing area. 15 Click Modify.rvt. for File name. and click Open. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Lock the line. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. navigate to your preferred location. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. click Load into Projects.

Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 46 Click Modify. and click OK. 49 With the component selected. and click Open. 28 In the Type Selector. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Duplicate. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click Modify. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. enter EPDM Membrane. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component. (Move). and click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click . and assign it keynote 07260. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 41 Select the component just added.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.G1. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. against the 3/4" plywood. 24 While pressing CTRL. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 27 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line. click in the Value column. 34 In the Name dialog. 47 Select the component. and click . and hidden) used in the view. 31 Select the component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. select i_Light Line Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 48 Using the same method used previously.A5. invisible. click Training Files. click Detail Component.A1. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. on the Edit toolbar. 37 Click OK 3 times. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 29 In the drawing area. 40 Click Modify. name the component Air Barrier. and assign it keynote 06110. 25 Next. 44 On the Design Bar. and click . click Edit/New. You add the components to the project and keynote them.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 321 . and click . leaving the detail component lines. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select Chain. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 55 Click Modify. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 53 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector.

2 x 8 Framing. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.rfa. click Detail Component. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select Invisible Lines. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. name the component Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. select the component. Air Barrier. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 60 On the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.58 Using the method used previously.A4. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element.

rvt. select Absolute. and press ENTER. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. 70 Using the method used previously. In the Type Selector. 71 In the drawing area. under Keynote Table. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A1. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.txt. and click Open. Enter 07460. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the drawing area. and click to place the note. click Keynote ➤ Element. click to place the leader. 11 Click Modify. and click . under Path Type. and click OK. Enter 07463. navigate to 07463. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.69 Select the component.A1. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. select all the keynotes. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.A4. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. click Browse. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Each keynote displays as a simple number. The database file opens in a text editor. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click OK. and press TAB. and assign it keynote 07210. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. name the component Batt Insul. add a keynote for the component.A9. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and press TAB. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 72 Save the file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 323 . select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. and close the text editor. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area.txt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the text editor.

you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Center to Center is selected. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. and click OK. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. The detail that you import is in DWG format.rvt. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select 3" = 1'-0". click Training Files. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. select Black and White. These details do not update with changes to the building model. After you create a drafting view. For Colors. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 14 Save the file.dwg. for Scale.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. For Positioning. verify that Auto . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout | 325 . 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.■ Click Open. Creating a Reference Callout on page 325. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. select Reference other view. right-click Drafting 1. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click Callout.rvt. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 5 Click Modify.

/Details. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Modify.No Reference).No Reference. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. and click Properties. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). and click OK. 10 In the Rename dialog. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click A105 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. click Rename. delete the existing value. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser./Sect. for New. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and double-click the callout. enter Detail .Elev. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK.18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 327 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0".rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Header @ Sliding Door. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. for Name. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.

select Wide Lines. click Finish Sketch. 14 Click OK 3 times. 19 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 18 While pressing CTRL. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. and click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . select the width dimension. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter 5/8". click Edit/New. Board. click Filled Region. enter Gyp. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 In the Name dialog. click . click Duplicate. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 17 Click Modify. for Name.5 In the Type Selector. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select Gypsum-Plaster. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Region Properties. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

click 22 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up. (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and on the Edit toolbar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point.

for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. click Filled Region. enter Wood . select Medium Lines. and click OK. and select the right edge of the wood region. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector.Finish. click Duplicate. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that the thickness is 3/4". 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.Finish. select Wood . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. 33 Click OK 3 times. for Name.25 Click Modify. click Region Properties. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rectangle). 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 38 On the Design Bar. enter 1/4". click Ref Plane. click . 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 42 On the Design Bar.37 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". select Medium Lines. click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Finish Sketch. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. sketch the new region as shown. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.

(Align).46 On the Tools toolbar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Select Chain. click Filled Region. click 48 Click Modify. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor right 1". 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click to select the point. enter 3/8". and press ENTER. For Offset. Move the cursor down 1'. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 47 Click the reference plane. Move the cursor left 1". For Offset. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click to select the point. and press ENTER. enter 0.

click (Trim/Extend). select Medium Lines. For Offset. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. top. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .54 On the Tools toolbar. 60 Select the left. and right edges of the door panel region. enter 1/8". and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Type Selector.

63 Repeat for the right detail line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. click Detail Component. and click Open. click Training Files. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. enter 3". Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. 65 On the Options Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 68 Click Modify.61 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. click Load. and press ENTER. select the height dimension. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 78 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Load. 79 In the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. 76 In the Type Selector.rfa. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Component. select Thin Lines. click . and click Open.70 On the Design Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. use the images as a guide. 80 On the Options Bar.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. (Mirror). drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. 87 Click Modify. 84 On the Design Bar. click . 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.89 On the Design Bar. as shown. 92 Select the line. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click (Mirror). 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines.

enter 1/8". 95 On the Design Bar. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 102 In the Type Selector. 97 On the Options Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click . select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. and click to place the arc as shown. 99 Click Modify. 101 On the Design Bar. select Break Line. click Detail Component.

for Text ➤ Units Format. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 106 Click to place the dimension. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 113 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. 107 Select the dimension line.3/32" Arial.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. the new style displays only inches. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 339 . enter Detail Linear . and click Modify. select To the nearest 1/16". and on the Options Bar. The dimension display is updated. click Dimension. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. 114 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. . click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 110 In the Name dialog. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. Select Suppress 0 Feet. click Duplicate. For Rounding.

and click Modify. select Replace With Text. enter See Schedule. 120 Under Text Fields. 121 Click OK.3/32”Arial. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. and enter Varies. 340 | Chapter 7 Detailing . drag the text for the smaller dimension. under Dimension Value. and then click the dimension text. click Dimension. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 117 Select the dimension line. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.115 In the Type Selector. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. for Below. using the Drag Text grip.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 341 . under Dimension Value. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. select Replace With Text. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B.125 Select Modify to end the command. 130 Click OK. and click the dimension text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. 128 Click OK. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog.

138 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. and on the Options Bar. click Text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 133 In the drawing area. 342 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to create an arced leader. 134 Enter Gyp.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 139 Save the file. and click Modify. select the gypsum board region on the left. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 132 In the Options Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and click to place the text. 135 Select the note. Board.

Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. and double-click East. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. 343 . you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.rvt. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.

click Modify. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.Hexagon. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 5 On the Options Bar.rfa. 7 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Training Files. type 1. 8 Select the keynote.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Symbol. for Number of Leaders.

and click above the tag to place the copy. for Text. Creating a Note Block | 345 .9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click OK. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). click (Copy). under Identity Data. type Seal existing doors and insulate. on the Options Bar.

15 For Text.14 With the copy selected. click (Element Properties). 17 Click OK. 16 For Tag. and on the Options Bar. type Repair existing door surround. type B. 18 Using the same method. 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Edit toolbar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. (Mirror). on the Options Bar. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click Copy. and click.

Tuckpoint as required. Remove all existing windows. using the table as a reference. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean exterior brick wall. 22 Optionally. click Modify. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 347 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

for Header text. Create. select Center. format. Select Text. verify that Arial is selected. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click Add.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. under Available fields. select Exterior Construction Notes. type Mark. and double-click A103 . expand Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. On the Appearance tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. select Tag. On the Formatting tab. for Heading. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. type Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. type 1/4''. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Note block name. 26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and select Bold. 27 In the column header (text). 28 In the Project Browser. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. select Tag.Elevations. expand Schedules/Quantities. type Description. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and for Alignment. and click Add. 29 In the Project Browser.

you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. click Modify.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists | 349 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.rvt.

change Drawing List to Sheet Index. ■ 4 Click OK. in the second field. under Available fields. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select does not equal. and drag it to the sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. type T. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. double-click T . 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. for Sort by. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Number. Select Sheet Name. and click Add. On the Filter tab. 5 In the list title field. and in the third field. under Sheets (all). 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the first field. for Filter by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List.Title Sheet.

windows. click Modify. and so on). Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. On construction documents. 11 Save the file. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Finally. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. and door frames. door frame schedule. On construction documents. For the text. doors. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties.9 On the Design Bar. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Training File Using Legends | 351 . Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.

for Name. select Arial.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. you create a text type with the necessary size. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click OK. click Text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click . type 1/8''. type Legend Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 For Text Size. 6 On the Options Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . and click OK twice. click Symbol. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 9 For Text Font. for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Open Level Head .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Edit/New.

drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 14 Working from the top down. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and double-click A101 . and for Leader. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that is selected. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 353 .

The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar.Unit 18.17 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. and click to place it. double-click A102 . under Sheets. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 23 Save the file.

for Name.rvt. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. For View. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 For Scale. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 3'. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Section. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 9 Select the second wall. For Host length. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. for Family. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 8 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. click Legend Component. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . type 4th Floor Wall Types.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click to add text without a leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 11 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 12 On the Options Bar.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Text. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. Creating a Component Legend | 357 . 18 Type the following text. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.

drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and click New Sheet. 22 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Legends. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . right-click Sheets (all). and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 24 In the Project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 4. 28 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. select the Wall Type 2 component. The open drawings are both visible. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 359 . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 Select the patio divider wall. 34 On the View Control Bar.32 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

contractor inquiries. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.35 Optionally. In this exercise. You can create a sequence of revisions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Using Revision Tracking | 361 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. These changes can be due to owner requests. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click 36 Save the file. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.rvt. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. double-click Level 4.

If you select Per Sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In most instances. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. For example. In general. 7 Under Show. if the active revision is number 1. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. verify that Per Project is selected. If Visible is not selected. 5 For Description. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type a date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. yet as concise as possible. When you use this option. When Issued is selected. for Numbering.

4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Save the file. you make changes to the project floor plan. click (Move). double-click Level 4. move the cursor up. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 5 Select the divider. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.rvt. click Modify. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 3 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds | 363 . Revision clouds have read-only properties.8 Click OK. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.

9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. In the Snaps dialog.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 8 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch. select Snaps Off. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.

and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 365 . select 6. 16 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. you load a revision tag into the project.

select Leader. 12 Save the file.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Training File 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 In the Tags dialog. double-click Level 4. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You then issue a revision. the cloud is tagged as number 1. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. 6 Click Load. under Floor Plans. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 5 In the Tags dialog. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Because you chose to number by project. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. click Tags. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rvt. click OK. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Revision Clouds.rfa. 10 In the drawing area. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you need to add one. 11 Click to place the tag. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.

Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. with the description Relocate Door. click Add. Working with Revisions | 367 . and enter a date for the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and enter a date. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.Unnamed. you prevent further changes to the revision. select Issued. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 9 Click OK. double-click A107 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can no longer modify it. 8 Add another revision row. type Modify Paving Area. under Sheets. You can continue to add revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. and click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 For Description.

17 Using the same method learned previously.Modify Paving Area. select Seq. under Sheets (all). double-click A107 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. select Revision Cloud. 12 In the drawing area. in the drawing area. 19 To add tags. apply Seq. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Drafting tab. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select the revision cloud. for Revision. 3 .Unnamed.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 2 . Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

for Sequence. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 25 Click OK twice. You do this so that the revision can be changed. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 26 In the drawing area. clear Issued. for Numbering. For each revision. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. delete the first 3 characters. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select the titleblock.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Click Options. you edit the titleblock family. Working with Revisions | 369 . beginning with "D". You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. height. select Alphabetic. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1.

click Modify. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. click Yes. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Edit. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and press DELETE. 28 In the alert dialog. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. for Build Schedule. Select Outline. under Other. click Load into Projects. select Bottom-up. Clear Blank row before data. Select Grid lines. for Appearance. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Edit Family. click Yes. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and click Properties. and drag it above the schedule area.27 On the Options Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 34 On the Design Bar.

for Rotation on Sheet.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 40 Select the revision schedule header. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. select the revision schedule. open the titleblock family for editing. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. enter Rev. When the height property is variable.. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. select User defined. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. With a user-defined height. 46 Click OK twice. for Height. under Other. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Formatting. and on the Options Bar. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. Working with Revisions | 371 . click Edit. select 90° Counterclockwise. right-click Revision Schedule. 45 On the Appearance tab. and click Properties. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. for Heading.

text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. 51 Save the file.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Load into Projects. 372 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. you learn to import information (such as images. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and place it on a sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet.Title Sheet. for Leader.rvt.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Training Files. under Sheets. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. click to add text without a leader. Importing Image Files | 373 . under Sheets. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.JPG. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . double-click T .

you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. with the new text box still selected. 11 Save the file. Training File 374 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 6 Select the text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

7 In the Revit Architecture window. click File menu ➤ Print. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.JPG. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and click Save. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. under Sheets. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. type Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar.Unit 18.mdi. for Name. select the document writer. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Under Printer. This step has been completed for you. and saved as Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. click Desktop. click Modify. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. double-click A102 .xls.JPG. click Training Files. 5 Click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Importing Spreadsheets | 375 . NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. for File name. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Save the file.

376 .

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. or footprint. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project. 377 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 379 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. under Level 2. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Level 2 . 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 2. double-click Level 2.Aviary. and click OK. select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 6 In the drawing area. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. The dependent view opens. 2 In the Project Browser. for Name.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

Labs. and click OK.10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and on the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. for Name. enter Level 2 . 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 15 Select the crop region.

20 Click in the drawing area. click Matchline. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. double-click Level 2.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click (Hide Crop Region).) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 16'. and click. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

select 9. click Level 2 . and drag it onto the sheet. 28 For Line Pattern. 33 In the Project Browser. click the Annotation Objects tab. click OK to accept the default titleblock. for Line Weight. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Name. under Floor Plans.Unnamed. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 385 . and click OK. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click A101 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click Rename. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Level 2 Aviary. select Double Dash 5/8''. expand Sheets. and click OK.Aviary. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 27 Under Matchline. 31 In the Project Browser.

39 On the Options Bar. for Target view. double-click Level 2. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. click Modify. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click View Reference. under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. 386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 387 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. for Target view.

click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. right-click. under Floor Plans. 47 On the View Control Bar. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 49 If.46 In the Project Browser. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.Aviary. double-click Level 2 . 48 Select the crop region. 388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. click (Show Crop Region).

54 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. right-click Level 2. and click Apply Dependent Views. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 389 . Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. under Floor Plans. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. expand Level 1. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. select all views in the list. but are not placed on sheets. 55 On the Zoom flyout. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 52 In the Project Browser. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region).

and double-click South Elevation. 390 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The matchline is already placed in the view. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. for Name. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation . select the Crop Region. and click OK. and click Rename. 5 In the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the aviary. enter South Elevation . 7 On the View Control Bar. expand South Elevation.Right. cropping the view to the lab building. 11 Select the crop region. right-click South Elevation. and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. for Name. and drag it toward the center of the view. 3 In the Project Browser.The dependent view opens. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 391 .Left. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog.

under Elevations. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.Right. under Sheets. click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter South Elevation. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. click South Elevation .13 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 392 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. click South Elevation .Left. and drag it onto the sheet. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A103 Unnamed. 16 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click (Hide Crop Region).

for Target view. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click South Elevation. click Modify. under Elevations. 25 On the Options Bar.Right. click View Reference. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 393 .Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. for Target view. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.22 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: South Elevation .

and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Select the crop region. 31 In the Project Browser. click Modify. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. NOTE If the view references are not visible.South Elevation.30 On the Design Bar. 394 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Sheets (all). Right-click the view. double-click A103 . and click Activate View.

Viewing and Rendering 395 .

396 .

you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. Daytime rendering of the pool house 397 . you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.

the pad. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. After you create the perspective view. add trees to the building site. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. you specify options that define the model environment. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. 398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In this exercise. and then render a final exterior view. When you complete these changes. and create the perspective view that you want to render. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 399

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 401

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 403

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 405.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 405

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 407

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 409.

Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Creating a Perspective View | 409

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

The perspective view displays.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground, as shown. Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as necessary. If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View | 411

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 413.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of the exterior.

You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 413

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 453. 3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model. After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.

10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ ■ ■

In the left pane, click Desktop. For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 415

under 3D Views.Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights.Night. click New. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. press and hold SHIFT.120V. under Lighting. 22 Using the same method. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . enter Pool House Lights. for Scheme.Day. and click Move to Group. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 27 In the Rendering dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Night view open. for Name. dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. click New. 25 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. and select the last light. right-click Exterior . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Day view to Exterior . and click Artificial Lights.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . click OK. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 16 With the Exterior . and click OK. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights.Night. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Dialog). you duplicate the view and change the settings. click Render. on the View Control Bar. under Group Options. verify that Pool Lights is selected. under Group Options. enter Pool Lights.Flat Round : 60W . for Name. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. select the first light. To select a sequential list. and click OK.

under Image. click Adjust Exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. you change the brightness of the exposure. 32 Save the file. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View on page 417. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. enter 4. for Exposure Value.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. In this example. Rendering an Interior View | 417 . you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. click Show the model.

define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. render the views. Adding RPC People In this exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. and finally. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

click Modify. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. ■ (Rotate). 6 Select the figure. double-click Level 1. select RPC Female : YinYin. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding RPC People | 419 . and place the component inside the pool house. under Floor Plans. and on the Edit toolbar. the person’s line of sight. click Component. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Exact placement is not important. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 5 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. click Edit. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. under Parameters. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. select Cast Reflections.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. on the Options Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. you can enable this option. click (Element Properties). and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 Save the file. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit/New. 12 Click OK 3 times.

and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. click Camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 421. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 421 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

under Extents. select Section Box. under 3D Views. 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. right-click 3D View 1.The perspective view displays. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

11 In the 3D view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 423 . double-click South. 9 In the Project Browser.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. select the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box. under Floor Plans.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 17 Save the file. doors that contain windows or glass. and curtain walls. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 425 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. To create a daytime view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 425. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view.

under Lighting. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 7 Under Quality. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. under 3D Views. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Night. click (Show Rendering Dialog). The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click Artificial Lights. and click Rename. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Render. 2 In the Rename View dialog. enter Interior . You can specify a lower quality. for Setting. 8 In the Rendering dialog. you turn them off for this scene. select Interior: Artificial only. After these settings are established. right-click 3D View 1. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. select Draft. 4 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. and click OK. for Scheme. clear Pool Lights.

select Region. The preset schemes are read-only. select Interior: Sun only. for Scheme. 13 In the Rendering dialog.Day. 3pm. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. click 14 For Setting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. the daylight portals can be turned on. (Show Rendering Dialog). NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 17 In the Rendering dialog. right-click Interior . see the Revit Architecture Online Help.Night. In this case. and click OK. You create a view for the interior during the day. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog.9 Close the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox . but the space will receive standard daylighting. For sunlit interiors. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . in order to turn on daylight portals. for Daylight Portal Options. for Sun. select Edit. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. For more information on daylight portals. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Copy To Custom. select Curtain Walls. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Santa Monica. and click Render. Creating the Interior Rendering | 427 . By default they are turned off. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. you must create a custom setting. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser.

under Image. enter 10. and close the Rendering dialog. enter 1. and on the Options Bar. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Properties). click Adjust Exposure. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. In the next steps. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Show the model. Click OK.18 In the Rendering dialog. (Element 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . For Saturation. select the column on the right.

move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. and click Render. the render time increases significantly. for Resolution.22 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 5''. 29 In the Rendering dialog. For Bump. for Setting. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. add a bump map to create texture. select High. For Width. select Wood. 24 In the Materials dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. clear Region. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Creating the Interior Rendering | 429 . 28 In the Rendering dialog. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. enter 90. 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Rendering dialog.6. For Rotate. and click OK. select Based on wood grain. For Amount. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. 23 With the column still selected. As size and DPI are increased. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click OK. under Output Settings. select Printer. click (Show Rendering Dialog). click the dimensions for Size. select Unfinished. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Scale (locked proportions). Click OK. You change the varnish setting. select the crop boundary.

The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. The walkthrough path is a spline.The rendered image displays. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Usually. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. or section view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. elevation.

■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Walkthrough. and click the tab in the context menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and change unit formats as desired. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. verify that Perspective is selected. expand Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 431 . and ends in the far corner of the living room.rvt. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. 432 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. Creating a Walkthrough | 433 . 12 On the View menu. If it is not. enter 9''. verify that Field of view is selected. on the Options Bar. 17 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click the dimensions for Size. enter 16''. 14 Click . 11 Under Change. for Frame. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 16 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1. and for Height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and click OK. for Width.

click Edit Walkthrough. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.The walkthrough plays. clear Far Clip Active.rvt. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 434 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 434. proceed to the next exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. press ESC. c_Townhouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Extents. under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Floor. and click OK.

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 435 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown. for Controls.

shading. for Compressor. 436 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and click OK. and click Save. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Recording the Walkthrough on page 436. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. enter 15. 9 To play the walkthrough. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. hidden line. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. . but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. specifying the number of frames. 3 Under Format. The walkthrough is recorded. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. on the Options Bar. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. c_Townhouse. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. under Output Length. reducing the size of the image. click Edit Walkthrough. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you export the walkthrough. 8 If you want to save this exercise. select <Shading>. or rendering. shading with edges. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. for Frames/sec. double-click Walkthrough 1. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Model Graphics Style. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system.

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. In this tutorial. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. 437 . you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.

and double-click 01 Entry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click shown. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. (SteeringWheels). expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A 3D view is created. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Solar Study . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. expand Views (all). as shown.rvt. click Training Files. click Camera.Courtyard View In this exercise. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 4 On the View toolbar. as 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

Courtyard View. expand 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry. you create a section cutaway view. click Save As. 3 On the Design Bar. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Section. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter Solar Study . if necessary. 9 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 439. as shown. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 439 . right-click 3D View 1. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.

enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. right-click Section 1. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. expand Sections. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and click Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 11 On the SteeringWheel.5 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . double-click the section head. as shown. 6 To view the section. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right.

double-click Callout of 01 Entry. including the house. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Floor Plans. then select Medium. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 441. 17 To hide the section box. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. In some cases. click . enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 16 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Typical plan views.14 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 18 On the File menu. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. and click Rename. as shown. do not display many elements in 3D. double-click 01 Entry. click Save. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. you create a plan cutaway view. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. then Fine. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click Rename. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 15 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. and click OK. click Callout. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 441 .

442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. 9 On the SteeringWheel. click Modify. 15 Select the Roof. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 11 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. so you can see into the building from the top.8 On the View toolbar. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.

18 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. under 3D Views. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 21 On the File menu. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. right-click {3D}. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 443 .17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Save. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

enter Summer Solstice. 9 In the Name dialog. For the Multi-Day solar study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. USA is selected. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and time range. and click OK. For this study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). and time. Los Angeles. click click OK. click .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise.Boston. 3 Select Cast Shadows.Creating Solar Studies . leave the slider at 50. MA. Click the Single-Day tab. or multi-day solar study. . and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. 4 For Sun Position.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. CA. select Los Angeles. for City. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. You can create a still. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. date range. 10 Under Place. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. date. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For the Single-Day solar study. you specify the location. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . USA. and click Duplicate. single-day. you specify the location.

16 In the Name dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 6 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date. select June 22. click OK. and click Duplicate. click OK. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. click . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. ■ For Time Interval. confirm that Summer Solstice. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 19 On the File menu. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click Save. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . under Frame. 2 On the View Control Bar. Under Frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 8 On the Options Bar. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In this case. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select December 22. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2008. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. enter Winter Solstice. and click OK. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 445 . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles is selected. for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Los Angeles. For Time Range. on the Single-Day tab. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. select Winter Solstice.Courtyard View is currently displayed. and click OK. enter 20 and press ENTER. 2008. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 445. and click OK.

■ To display the previous sequential frame. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Text. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click . click . Los Angeles. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. approximately as shown. . and click OK. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. double-click 01 Entry.■ To display the next key frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. The solar study animation plays. . click To display the next sequential frame. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Sun Position. on the Single-Day tab. . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click OK. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. select Summer Solstice. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

6 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Exporting the Study as AVI | 447 . 5 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . approximately as shown. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Options Bar. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click . 8 For Sun Position. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click and enter Dining. verify that Cast Shadows is selected.

Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. click OK. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Frame Range. 11 To display the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. on the Single-Day tab. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . if necessary. and click OK. Los Angeles. clear Section Boxes. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. and enter 5 to 50. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Click outside of the section box. select the section box. and click OK. 15 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. as shown. select Summer Solstice. verify that the value is set to 15. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. ■ For Frames per second. under Output Length. On the Annotation Categories tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and click OK. for Model Graphics Style. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. or frame. you open each image. select Winter Solstice. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. under Output Length. For File Name.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG | 449 . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Files of Type. To view the animation. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 449. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 For Sun Position. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . 21 Proceed to the next exercise.Los Angeles. click OK. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. verify that Hidden Line is selected. of the animation separately.■ ■ Under Format. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. For Dimensions. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . select AVI Files. enter 450 in the first field (width). and enter 5 to 10. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. For Frames per second. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. Click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. select Frame Range. verify that the value is set to 15.

Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. depending on the Frame Range. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.Los Angeles.■ For Dimensions. or GIF. enter 450 in the first field (width). For File name. click Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 8 Click Save. BMP. click the Desktop icon. In this example. such as JPEG. or any single-frame format. For Files of Type. under 3D Views. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. TIFF. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select PNG. as shown: 9 On the File menu. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Click OK.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 451 . as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .Los Angeles . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. MA. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.Week Interval. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for File name enter 2pm . click the Multi-Day tab. 12 In the Name dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. select One week. 5 Select the roof. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . USA. and on the View Control Bar. for Sun Position. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click OK.Boston. and click Duplicate. For Time. specify 2:00 pm. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. For Time Interval.

you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for Compressor. for File Name. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click the Desktop icon. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar. When you mirror a project. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. In the Length/Format dialog.West or North . such as East . under Floor Plans. and click OK. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. click OK.South. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). and click Save. and annotations in non-drafting views. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. model views.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click 01 Entry. you mirror all model elements. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. Re-orienting the Project | 453 .

View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For additional information.West. The project is mirrored along the East . Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. right-click. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. In this exercise. select the roof.West axis. 5 In the warning dialog. click OK.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. and click OK. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 6 On the Standard toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. Then. select East . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

select Cast Shadows. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 8 For Sun Position. and click OK. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. Orienting to True North | 455 . select Summer Solstice. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 For Sun Position. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22.3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. change the time back to 12:00 PM. and select Winter Solstice. For example. 12 Under Date and Time. 10 Under Date and Time. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. specify 11:00 AM for time. 5 For Sun Position. click Apply. on the Still tab. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.

22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and select Winter Solstice. 19 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. under Floor Plans. 15 For Sun Position. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click Properties.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). right click 01 Entry. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click OK. for Orientation. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. double-click 01 Entry. select True North. When a project is started. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. and click OK. 456 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North.

■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. Orienting to True North | 457 . The floor plan rotates in the view.

select True North Orientation. click the Still tab. click . under 3D Views. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 25 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. right-click. and click Properties. and click Element Properties. select True North. select Project North. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click OK. for Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 458 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. select Summer Solstice. right-click 01 Entry. and click Apply. for Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the View Control Bar. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. right-click. enter True North Orientation. and click OK.23 In the Project Browser. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 33 For Sun Position. 27 In the Rename View dialog.

and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. click Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. and click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Click Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click OK. for Compressor. verify that AVI Files is selected. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click the Desktop icon. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. For File Name. enter 600 in the first field. for Dimensions. under Format. click the Single-Day tab. Orienting to True North | 459 . For Files of Type. and click OK. click OK.

and 2:00 PM. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Render. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. for Date and Time. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. For Sun. 1 In the Project Browser. select Medium. select Interior: Sun only. under 3D Views. Since a rendered image is temporary. Rendered views do not have this limitation. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. capturing it. for Setting. and exporting it as a JPEG image. under Quality. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. and click OK. select Edit/New. select Winter Solstice. 3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. (Show Rendering Dialog). Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In this exercise.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. select 12/22. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. and click Duplicate. Under Lighting. and click OK. 460 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397 for additional information on rendering. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. In the Name dialog. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. enter living area_winter solstice. Rendering an Interior View | 461 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Export. and click OK. click Save to Project.6 In the Rendering dialog.

462 .

type. For the realistic approach. advanced model graphics. and section boxes. an outside reviewer. sections. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. however. length. They include rendering. you explore the stylistic approach. and details. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Whether the audience is the general contractor. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. In this series of exercises. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Other tools in the software. linework. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Co-house. you can choose between realism and stylistics. When organizing presentation graphics. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Using the pre-built building model. or the client. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. 463 . elevations.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. a consultant. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. In this tutorial.

you create a copy of the plan. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

rvt. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 465 . Cnst. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 2nd Flr. click Training Files. and click OK. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst. under Floor Plans.

exit the menu. dimensions. this represents the view getting smaller. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 8 Click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click the Scale control and select 1/8" = 1’ 0". Down Arrow. UP Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 11 In the Save As directory. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. No annotations display in the view. navigate to the folder of your choice. name the project i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 466. and clear DOWN Text. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. sections. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. and click Save. and other annotations in this view. and Up Arrow. click in the drawing area.rvt. 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.

and click OK. the darker the shadows. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. Time and Place. on the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 7 For Place. select By Date. MA. click the Place tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click . you can create. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The higher the number. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). At that place. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . modify. Within a project. For Sun Position. specify 35.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 6 Under Settings. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 For City. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 467 . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. ■ For Contrast. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Boston. select Cast Shadows. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world.

click OK. for Date and Time. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click OK. for Sun Position. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can select any city. 1:00 PM. . and select 1st Flr. under Settings. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. If you select a different city. however. click (Shadows On). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Cnst. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK.NOTE For this step. 12 Click OK. specify 10/27. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen.

click Add View. select Arch D 36 x 24 Portrait. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 469. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 469 . and click Add View to Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not available. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click to place it. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click View. and click OK.19 Proceed with the next exercise. The viewport displays at the cursor. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 4 In the Views dialog.

enter Presentation. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and notice the view title. Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 12 In the Name dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click Duplicate. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Show Title. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. click Edit/New. select No. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. For this analytique. click OK. and click OK. and click OK. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. To accomplish this. click Modify.

draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 471 . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. When you finish drawing the chain. 18 On the Options Bar. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and select Chain. click Filled Region.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . 17 In the Type Selector. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and the boundary of the region. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. If necessary. select Invisible lines. click . fill properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections.

click Duplicate. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. enter Presentation. under Identity Data. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. click OK. scroll down. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. click Edit/New. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Solid Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 472. under Name. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click OK.22 On the Design Bar. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Graphics. click . 30 On the Design Bar. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. for Sheet Name. and click View Properties. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 473 .rvt.

2 In the Project Browser. 12 Under Shadow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and clear Elevation Swing. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 9 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click OK. click . and click OK. click Duplicate. specify 35. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Visibility. 16 In the Name dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. click in the Walls row. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 2:30 PM. expand the Doors category. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Pattern Overrides. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Time and Place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Visibility. click (Shadows Off). on the Model Categories tab. and click Rename. click Override. click in the drawing area. 14 For Sun Position. under Elevations. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 13 For Contrast. and click OK. select By Date. right-click Copy of South. 18 For Time. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. exit the menu. clear Visible. select Cast Shadows. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. scroll up. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 475 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 475. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A106 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 3 In the Views dialog. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The view title no longer displays. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 477.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 477 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

rvt. Cnst. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). and use the flip arrows if necessary. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Flr. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the section shown below.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select 1/8" = 1'. for Scale. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section.0". Adjust the controls to modify the extents.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 479 . To fit correctly in the analytique. for Scale. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1/8" = 1'. To accomplish this.Section 2 is added to the building model. expand Sections (Callout 1). 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180°.0". click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view.

under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. click Override. click in the Walls row. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Visible. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Elevation Swing. and click Rename. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Visibility. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. click Modify. under Pattern Overrides. expand the Doors category. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. scroll up.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation Section 2. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 Under Visibility.

(Hide Crop Region). and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 20 Click OK. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 482. 22 On the View Control Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 481 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. When you select the crop region.

6 In the Name dialog. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the steps that follow. in the Project Browser. specify 35. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). under Sections (Callout 1). specify the following: Under Shadow. In addition. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. double-click Presentation Section 2. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click . and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. ■ For Sun Position. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. For Contrast. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Duplicate. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Click Apply. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar.

The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 484. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and click OK. specify 135°. Select Relative to View. was added to this training file for training purposes. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. For Altitude. click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Azimuth. for Silhouette style. select Directly. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 483 . specify 70°. Click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The line style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Shadows On). Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.

3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click to place the selected view.Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click A106 .

move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. select Viewport : Presentation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. To rotate an object. and press Enter. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. Using a clock as a reference. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. click (Rotate). 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click Modify.5 In the Type Selector. you click to specify the start radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. The view title no longer displays. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 485 . enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. double-click Section 2. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. The section needs to be rotated 180°.

The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.The callout rotates 180°. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). double-click A106 . 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Presentation.

15 On the Design Bar. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 487. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template | 487 . click Modify. After applying the view template to a new section view.

and click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. double-click Presentation Section 2. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt.

The furniture. and click OK. Working with a Presentation View Template | 489 . 15 Right-click the viewport. annotations.Presentation. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. double-click A106 . under Graphics. and click Add View to Sheet. lighting fixtures. 14 In the Type Selector.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. under Sheets (all). click Add View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select Presentation. under Names. select Section: Presentation Section 1. select Viewport : Presentation. and elevation swings no longer display. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select 90° Counterclockwise. and click Deactivate View. 18 Right-click the viewport. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Activate View.

such as a tracery window or a column capital. In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 490. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail.

double-click Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. After you add the callout. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1).rvt. 4 In the Project Browser. click Callout. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. as shown. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Working in a Callout Analytique | 491 .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Callout of Section 1. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

and click OK. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and adjust the bottom to create a small gap.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties. and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the crop region. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. 6 In the Project Browser. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click.

select Custom. under Sheets (all).Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique | 493 . double-click A106 . specify 22. Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. For Scale Value 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Modify. click Add View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Activate View.

activate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). 23 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. click Edit/New. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Region Properties. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Right-click the callout presentation view. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. and move it to the position shown below. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. When finished. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast.

When you are finished. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 28 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 495 . for Fill Pattern. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. select Solid fill. on the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. double-click A106 .Presentation. and click OK 3 times.25 In the Type Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). click . click Finish Sketch. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar.

32 On the Design Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 34 Select the crop region. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click .31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and sketch the rectangle shown below.

37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 497 . click (Hide Crop Region). and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 497. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar.

Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click 1" = 20'-0". double-click Isometric. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. under 3D Views. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. click the Scale control. click (Shadows Off). 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and apply shadows to the views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View Control Bar.

in the list. For Sun Position. double-click Isometric 2. under Extents. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click OK. and click Rename. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Altitude. and click OK. For Azimuth. and click Rename. select Silhouette Edges. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. specify 35. enter Isometric 2. Select 1st Flr. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. select Directly. For Contrast. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. right-click Isometric. specify 45°. for Silhouette style. click . specify 135°. and click OK. click Duplicate. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Cnst. select Section Box. A section box displays around the building model. 12 In the Rename View dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 499 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Cast Shadows. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Isometric 1. Select Relative to View. 8 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. Grips display on each face of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box.19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. as shown.

make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. enter Isometric 3. right-click Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box. When you are finished. 22 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 501 . double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. 23 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 25 To hide the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. If desired. 21 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. you can adjust the plane location. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 27 Select the section box. clear Section Boxes.

under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. The filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 31 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.Next. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under 3D Views.Presentation. double-click A106 . drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under Sheets (all). In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 32 In the Project Browser.

39 For Background. select Concrete. 40 Click OK twice. and click Activate View. 41 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 503 . redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. for Fill Patterns. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. click Lines. select Transparent. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 35 Select the poche filled region. On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit.

50 Proceed with the next exercise. 46 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 47 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 505.43 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill.

a cutaway perspective view.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. The view opens immediately. double-click 1st Flr. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 505 . Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. then you specify the eye direction and range. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. Cnst.rvt. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.

and click OK. click . 6 On the View Control Bar. for Name. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun Position. and click OK. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). for Silhouette style.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 506 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Contrast.

12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 507 .Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK.

and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click A106 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. click Size. 18 On the View Control Bar. for Width. under Change. select Viewport : Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 15 On the Options Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet.14 Select the crop region. On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. you must specify the actual size of the image. clear Section Boxes. 17 Under Model Crop Size.Presentation. In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). 508 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). 19 To hide the section box. enter 6 1/2".

12 In the Element Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 509. specify a text size of 1/4". 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. enter Title.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Annotating the Analytique | 509 . select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 1 1/2". select Text : Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. 10 In the Name dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. under Text. select a font. click Edit/New. enter Description. click Duplicate. under Text. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. click Text. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. click . Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. double-click it in the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A106 . click Duplicate. and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 510 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the Design Bar.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 In the Type Selector. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

Importing and Exporting 511 .

512 .

Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. you create a small building from the front mass form. In this tutorial. such as walls. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. 513 . that compose the building. curtain walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

select All. and open Imperial\Templates\default. click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. visible elements. and click Save. 4 In the New Project dialog. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. buildings. under Template file. click Create Mass. click the Massing tab. click Training Files. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. For Colors. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. Double-click the Common folder. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. right-click in the Design Bar.rte. for File name. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 9 In the informational dialog. click OK. For Files of type. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Import units. or select from a list. 2 In the New Project dialog. ■ 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select Preserve. and not in the library. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. enter Import SketchUp. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. select SketchUp Files. For Layers. click Browse. select Auto-Detect. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 6 In the Save As dialog. enter SketchUp Model.skp. you create a Revit Architecture project. Click the Sketchup file.

curtain walls. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. For Place at level.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. select Manual . click the Close button. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 515 . depending on the complexity of the project. In a new project. ■ ■ For Positioning. 17 In the warning dialog. click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. Click Open. select Level 1.Center. click . ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 16 On the Design Bar. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Level 1 is the only choice. and roofs. 14 On the View toolbar. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. such as walls.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. that compose the building. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 4 On the Options Bar. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. and on the View Control Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 3 In the Type Selector. and roofs. select the face so that it highlights in red. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 516. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. verify Level 2 is selected. After you create the building from the mass faces. click Roof by Face. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. for Level. verify Basic Roof: Generic .18 Proceed to the next exercise. such as walls. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. curtain walls.12'' displays.

on the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. To see the new roof. click Create Roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click to display masses. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click Create Roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. A roof is created from the mass face.

■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face.

8'' displays. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. verify Basic Wall: Generic .15 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. for Loc Line. 16 On the View toolbar.

25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 5' x 10' displays. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click Curtain System by Face.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . click Create System. 32 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 31 Using the same technique.

and on the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. and select it. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Create System. click Curtain System. click Create Roof. 522 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Wall by Face. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. select the other wall. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.

43 Click to redisplay the masses. double-click Level 1. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. specify a point to place the camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and select the mass face shown below. Below the right corner of the view. 42 On the View toolbar. click Camera. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 523 . Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.

specify a point for the camera target. as shown. 48 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The perspective view created by the camera displays. click your building in the view.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. to view only the walls. 524 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Click the frame to display its grips. roofs. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

select Center. for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. 50 On the Options Bar. select Center. Click OK. click . 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 525 . click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify.

and click Cancel to end the command. double-click 3D View 1. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click {3D}. 55 Right-click. 526 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 63 In the Type Selector. click Door. verify Single-Flush: 36'' x 84'' displays. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. and move the roof edges as shown below. 59 On the View toolbar. 56 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 527 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing.

528 .

Using Advanced Features 529 .

530 .

they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. and they are not windows. and mullions. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you select the grid. grid lines. to resize the system. and you can change these elements individually. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. To change grids. you create a curtain system using the wall command. Like walls. 531 . A typical curtain system comprises a wall. panel. This affects the entire curtain system. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. To switch panel types. For example. you need to select a panel. Like windows. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Unlike windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you need to change the length of the wall.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. or you can use a specific curtain system command.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. click Training Files. click Wall. and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.rvt.

Creating an Entrance | 533 . 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

For Top Offset. and click (Properties). you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. top constraint. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .11 Select the curtain system. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. using curtain grids. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. enter 4'0". Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and room bounding. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top and base attachments. Click OK. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF.

and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 4'0" above the ground floor level line. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Rename. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Creating an Entrance | 535 . right-click Elevation 1 . double-click GROUND FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 18 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid.a. 23 Place another grid 5'0" above the first grid. 20 In the drawing area.

SIXTH FLOOR. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . THIRD FLOOR. click Modify. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. while pressing CTRL. FOURTH FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 25 On the Design Bar. one larger than the other. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. FIFTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. 26 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to create a vertical grid.24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. select SECOND FLOOR.

and then select the segment above it.32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Next. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed. 33 On the Design Bar. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Creating an Entrance | 537 . click Add or Remove Segments. Click to place another grid line. click Modify.

and lock them.The two segments are removed. click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. 38 Using the same method. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.

TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click in any white space to exit the editor. You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Use the following image as a guide. Do not click between the 6-foot panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 539 . 43 Delete the dimensions. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.

You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Modify. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. not as curtain panels. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 51 Select the left 6-foot panel.Next. click Training Files. on the new curtain system you added. This changes the graphics style of the Next.rfa. and click Wireframe. and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 56 In the Project Browser. Now. The panel changes to a double door. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. double-click Entrance Elevation. 52 On the Type Selector. you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. They are part of the curtain panel category. 57 On the View Control Bar. click view. . 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. These panels schedule as doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 55 In the Project Browser. 54 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Elevations.

click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 541 . click System Panel : Solid. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and the solid panels display in white. 65 On the View Control Bar.60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice. 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panels display in blue.

so you remove them next. however. click Mullion. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 4'0" above the ground floor. clickModify. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. there are a few that you do not want. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select Entire Grid Line. 10 Delete the mullions below them.rvt. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.68 On the File menu. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. select Grid Line Segment.

Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 543 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You are going to change some mullion joins. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 14 Click the top mullion control.Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR.The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 15 On the Design Bar. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 17 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. click Wall. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Finally. 4 In the Type Selector. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 5 Click . you can also right-click. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 16 In the Project Browser. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. double-click Southeast Isometric. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. This completes the exercise for adding mullions.

9 Place the second point at the lower right side. enter 4'0". 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. For Top Offset. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 545 . for Top Constraint. (Arc passing through three points). Click OK. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR.6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Options Bar.

15 Zoom in to the cylinder. double-click East. under Elevations. Divide the halves into quarters. and then sixteenths. eighths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 14 In the Project Browser. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. you place grids on the system.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.12" . click Modify. you change some panels in the system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. select the bottom layer of panels. Next. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 547 . select Basic Wall: Generic . Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system.16 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 4". 6 On the Options Bar, click .

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion, and click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. .

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the family as Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Panel - Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click, and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar, click 25 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector, select System Panel - Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 549

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
In this exercise, you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar:

Click

(Polygon). , and select it.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click
■ ■

For Sides, enter 8. Select Radius, and enter 2" for the radius.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Cylinder Mullion - detail.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 551

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Select the detail component, and click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded, it can be added as a mullion type. 27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 31 Click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK. 36 Under Construction, for Profile, select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE.

44 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom elements to the system.

Additional Curtain Systems
In this lesson, you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system, a storefront system, and a ruled curtain system.

Additional Curtain Systems | 553

Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.

7 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Family, select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level, enter 2' 0". Click OK.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar, select Entire Grid Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.

Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

Storefront System | 555

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0". 6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

556 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall, and click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall, the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing, and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 5' 0". This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 5’ 0". The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance, and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 8'0". This means that the panel heights will be exactly 8', even if the wall height changes. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number

Storefront System | 557

is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15. 16 Click OK.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid.

20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

Curtain System by Lines
In this exercise, you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

558 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level, and highlight the model line.

Curtain System by Lines | 559

8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Select the panel, and click .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.

560 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a ruled curtain system.

Curtain System by Lines | 561

562

Roofs

15
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Training File

Click File menu ➤ Open.

563

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

564 | Chapter 15 Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof | 565 . centerline. and so on). you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click the blue square on the witness line. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. click Lines. sketch the roof profile. 16 On the View toolbar.

press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Views (all). The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Sections (Type 1). Creating an Extruded Roof | 567 . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Next. and double-click Section 1. press CTRL. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and select the second wall. click Modify. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and then select the exterior face of the wall. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 568.24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Attach for Top/Base.

verify that Defines slope is selected.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 569 . i_Roofs. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and double-click Garage Roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. Next. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. sketch the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Yes. 3 In the Project Browser. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.rvt. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the Options Bar. By default. 11 Press CTRL. click Finish Roof. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click (Properties). 13 On the Design Bar. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. clear Defines slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click the model. 14 When you see the informational dialog. select both slope definition lines. and on the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. 15 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and click OK. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. under Dimensions. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 571.

Next.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. sketch the chimney opening. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to select all the walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. When you complete the roof. press TAB. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Roofs. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. click Pick Walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls.rvt. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 571 . expand Views (all).

select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. click (Rectangle). click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 8 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 15 On the Options bar. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. Next. 18 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

rvt. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Next. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 573. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. close the roof sketch. click Pick Walls. i_Roofs. select Defines slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 573 . clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). click Lines. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click (Pick Lines). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 3 On the Options Bar.

14 Under Constraints. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 11 To trim the first line segment. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. Next. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof Properties. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. click Finish Roof. select the left vertical slope definition line. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar.

22 Using the same method that you used previously. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.16 On the View toolbar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 17 On the View toolbar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575 . click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify.

576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 576. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs. Next. 23 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).rvt. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

and double-click Level 2. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. press TAB. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 9 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577 . clear Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. select the left vertical roof line.1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Pick Walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. expand Views (all). click (Trim/Extend). you add a slope-defining line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier.

18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.rvt. i_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. expand Floor Plans. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 19 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. select Defines slope. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 4 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 16 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. expand Views (all).12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and click OK. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (SteeringWheels). and double-click Level 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578. click 20 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). 13 On the Options Bar.

you need to add two reference planes. click Slope Arrow. add two new slope arrows. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 .15 to add the second slope arrow. click (Pick Lines).5 On the View menu. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 14 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 11 On the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Split Walls and Lines. Next. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Ref Plane. Before you can add slope arrows. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. clear Defines Slope. click Modify. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Next.

17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. expand Floor Plans. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. enter 12'' for Rise/12". This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Defines Slope. click Modify. enter 6'' for Rise/12". NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). on the Options Bar. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. The eave lines display with a dimension. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. When eave heights differ. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click Edit. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and then click OK. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and click OK. 18 Press CTRL. select both slope arrows. click Align Eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and double-click Garage Roof. under Dimensions. (Properties). Aligning Roof Eaves on page 580. When aligning eaves. and click 19 Under Constraints. select Slope for Specify. i_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and move the cursor to place the arrow.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 581 . on the File menu. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.Next. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.rvt. click Save As. 12 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 581. 14 If you want to save your changes. select a method to align the eaves. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. (Properties). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Elevations. and double-click North. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. click Lines.1 In the Project Browser. Next. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 6 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. on the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.

and select the remaining three lines. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. and then select Defines slope. click mansard roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 584. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click Save As. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. on the File menu.10 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. under Dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 583 . click (Pick Lines). 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click . press TAB. 17 On the View toolbar.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. After you add the roof.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Pick Walls. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. you add a roof to a building shell.

verify that Defines slope is not selected. click (Trim/Extend). 7 On the Tools toolbar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.4 On the Options Bar. Because the walls are not continuous. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .

EPDM. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Steel Truss . click Roof Properties. double-click the section head to open the section view. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Insulation on Metal Deck . for Type. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

18 Move the cursor down.The roof has been created. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 587 . 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click Roof. In the next steps. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. and click to select it. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. (Add points). Next. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .You create a split line vertically down the center. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. and select a point on the opposite roof line.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). exact placement of the points is not important. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 589 . 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. You modify the points individually. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. for the dimension. and press ENTER. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''.In this exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.

and select all of the roof edges. for Elevation. click Modify. 27 Press and hold CTRL.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. enter 4''. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. including the interior edges of the roof regions. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 29 On the Design Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

under Construction. click Edit. 31 Select the roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 591 . The entire slab is sloped. for the Thermal/Air Layer. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Variable. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 36 View the results in the section view. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. By making the insulation layer variable. 35 Click OK 3 times. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click (Properties). double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. click Edit/New. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Structure. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer.

and soffits in Revit Architecture. Gutters. Creating Fascia. 5 On the Options Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. you can easily create its fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. gutters. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Gutters. 3 Press CTRL. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fascia-Built-Up. you learn how to create roof fascia.rfa. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and Soffits on page 592. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Training Files. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. After you create a roof. gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and soffits. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center.rvt. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click (Properties). 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and Soffits In this lesson. Creating Fascia. click Save As. and click Open.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Gutters on page 594. under Construction. Creating Roof Fascia | 593 . and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Edit/New. and click OK three times. click in the Value field for Material. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 3 In the Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. c_Condominium. under Construction. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click (Properties). and click OK. . click Duplicate. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 594 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar.rvt.Creating Gutters In this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Views. Creating Soffits on page 595. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits | 595 . 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. and double-click Roof. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Roofs. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. 596 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 8 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar.

9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. Creating Soffits | 597 . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

598 .

In the final exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Training Files. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. expand Floor Plans. Finally. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. and verify that Level 1 is the active view.rvt. 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. expand Views (all).Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. If you are using metric units. your values will be different. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. and open Common\c_Area. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 599 . 3 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. and click Room and Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. click the Area Schemes tab. click Settings. View predefined area schemes 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 In the New Area Plan dialog. These schemes define spatial relationships. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click the Room Calculations tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Create a gross building area plan 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. or 0. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. 5 Click Cancel. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. Click OK. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. it is not necessary in this exercise. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click Area Plan. the system-computed height defaults to the level. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to 4 feet or above the level. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views.

Create a rentable area scheme and plan 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. under Views (all). NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you create a new area plan for rentable space. common areas. To modify the area. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must manually add these boundary lines. you must select one of the reference lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 601 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. rather than the area tag. 11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. forming a closed loop. click Area Plan. If you select No. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 9 In the Project Browser. and store area. Next. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Click OK. 13 In the New Area Plan dialog.8 When the informational dialog displays.

Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). you can either draw them or pick them. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. When you add area boundary lines. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. When you pick the walls. 15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Area Boundary. If you do not select this option. 18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.14 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 20 In the upper left corner of the building model. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Add area boundary lines 16 On the Design Bar. click Area. 19 On the Design Bar.

click Area. 26 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.21 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the area. Click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 603 . click Modify. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.

Select Office area for Area Type. 32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 31 Add an area to the building model core. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.28 On the Options Bar. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Click OK. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 604 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name.

34 Navigate to your preferred directory. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 605 . the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 33 On the File menu. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Save.rvt. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. name the project Area-in progress. and click to place the legend. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. and click Save.Notice that within the two store areas. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

under Category.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 606 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 607 . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

608 .

At any time. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and perimeter information. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. roofs. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and floors. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you then need to update the building face. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and roofs. After creating mass floors. In this tutorial. you can specify the view to display massing elements. floor. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. curtain systems. After you make building elements. building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. or both. 609 . volume. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. If you modify a massing face. You assign the default wall. floors. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model.

you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and click Massing. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. click Create Mass. sweeps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all).rvt. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and cutting geometry. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

click 18 On the Options Bar. click the value for Material. (Line). for Extrusion End. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Materials and Finishes. 10 In the Materials dialog. enter 80'0". under Floor Plans. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 12 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). (Pick Lines). 13 On the View toolbar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. double-click Level 1. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 611 . and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for Name. and click . 15 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. This means the sketch line is placed 5 feet from the position you pick with the cursor.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. for Offset. under Views (all). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. enter 5'0". select Mass (Opaque).

for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion Start. under Views (all). 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 23 In the Materials dialog.20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. double-click West. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). for Extrusion End. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. enter 90'0". under Constraints. and click . and click OK. highlight the larger form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 80'0". 25 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Pick a plane. 30 In the drawing area. select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Sketch. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click the value for Material. double-click {3D} to see the results. The second form is on top of the first form.

click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and clear Chain. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). 31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point. press TAB to highlight the entire face. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and on the Options Bar. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 613 . 34 On the Options Bar. Next. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.TIP If necessary. click (Draw).

and delete the vertical construction line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 41 On the Edit toolbar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click (Move). 37 On the Options Bar. TIP If you do not see this option. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click (Arc passing through three points). 39 On the Design Bar.36 Sketch a line 19 feet up as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Modify.

48 On the Options Bar. for Material. click Edit Top. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 49 Create an arc as shown. on the Options Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and that -300'0" is specified for Second End. 50 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. click Lines and. under Views (all).Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. double-click East. (Arc passing through three points). click (Default 3D View). click Finish Sketch. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 52 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 615 . (Line). 53 On the View toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar.

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. under Views (all). Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 616. click Ref Plane. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. select the mass.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. i_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.54 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. In the next exercise. double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 Using the same technique. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Lines. enter 40'0" and for Extrusion Start. click (Pick Lines) and enter 50' for Offset. When sketching each extrusion. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. and select Chain. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. for Extrusion End. place 3 more reference planes 50' apart from left to right. 6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane. on the View Control Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. enter 0. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 14 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View).4 On the Options bar. and place the first reference plane 50' to the right. snap the corners to the intersections. as shown. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 15 Click OK. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click Finish Sketch. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 617 . 16 On the Design Bar. click (Line).

under Floor Plans. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. i_Massing_Start. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.In this exercise. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. double-click Level 1. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path.

6 On the Design Bar. Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. select a point below the mass elements. click Finish Path. The only way to align these elements is visually. ■ For the radius.■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Using Swept Blends | 619 .

click Profile 2.Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. as shown. and click Edit. 10 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Lines. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Rectangle). 13 On the Tools toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 On the Options Bar. and sketch a 20' x 20' rectangle on the face of the mass. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. and press ESC. click (Default 3D View). click Profile 1. click Finish Profile.

click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 621 . 22 Click OK twice. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click Finish Swept Blend. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and click . select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Profile. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. click <By Category>. 21 In the Materials dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar.17 Using the same method.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. under Materials and Finishes. as shown: ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar.

25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Finish Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file.rvt. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 26 Save the file as i_Massing_Complete. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .24 On the Design Bar. Finally.

enter 150' x 15' x 35'. 3 In the Name dialog. 7 Click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Depth. and click Apply.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 9 Click OK. enter 225' x 30' x 60'. Creating New Mass Family Types | 623 . enter 60'0". click Family Types. enter 35'0". and click OK.rfa. and click Apply. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 50' x 60' x 40'. click New. and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box. enter 150'0". 5 Click New. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 40'0". In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 15'0". In this exercise. 8 For Width. for Height. enter 50'0". and for Name. for Height. 6 For Width. and for Name. for Depth. for Width. for Depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 225'0". and click Apply.rfa. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 60'0". for Height. enter 30'0". under Other. and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. 1 If not already selected.rvt. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'.rfa family files. and Triangle. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place. under Floor Plans. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Views (all). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 6 Open the Box-Training. double-click Site. 8 In the Type Selector.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You also load other existing mass families and place them.rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. on the View toolbar. as shown. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Arc Dome. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Training Files. click Training Files. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .

24 On the Design Bar. as shown. select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'. for the Material parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and click to place the mass. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 625 . 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. specify Mass (Transparent). select Rotate after placement. for the Material parameter. 11 Select the box. and click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'. click Place Mass. select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. click Place Mass. click Modify. enter 90 for Angle. click (Element Properties). 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 14 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. 25 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). and click (Element Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

33 On the View toolbar.26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Opaque). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Default 3D View). and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

click (Default 3D View). Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. In the next exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.rvt file.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements | 627 . you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the i_Massing_In-place.

double-click Site. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. on the Edit toolbar. under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' as shown.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. click (Mirror).

TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. for Axis. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. enter SM. (Join Geometry). and then select the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first. click (Draw). Joining Mass Elements | 629 . click (Default 3D View). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.In this exercise. 1 On the Design Bar. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_In-place. click (Add to Design Option Set).) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. and select the triangle mass element. do not clear the check mark. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . (If Design Options is already selected. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.rvt.

7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. under Floor Plans. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 20'R x 9'H. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 631 . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 8 On the Options Bar. enter 90.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 14 In the drawing area. click Modify. and click OK. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for the Material parameter. 5 In the Project Browser. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. specify Mass (Transparent). select Sloped (primary). click Place Mass. double-click Site. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Place Mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 35' x 50' x 25'. and click (Element Properties). for Angle. clear Curved. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 13 On the Design Bar.

22 In the Project Browser. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click (Element Properties).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. select the three arc domes. select Curved. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and watch the status bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 26 On the Design Options toolbar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for the Material parameter. While pressing CTRL. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Views (all). clear Sloped. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 20 In the drawing area. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click North. 23 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. and click OK twice. TIP To find the correct shapes. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Modify. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. and click OK.

In this exercise. click Make Primary.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. 35 On the File menu. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 34 Close the warning that displays. click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 31 Click the value for Design Option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click (Design Options). you can make it the primary option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. under Option. and click Close. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Curved and. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 33 In the Design Options dialog. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 633 . you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. and click OK.

5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Pick Faces). under Views (all).Brick on CMU. you pick massing faces to create walls. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and for Loc Line.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. select Wall Centerline. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click Wall by Face. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

9 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 5. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 1.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 635 .

19 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 21 On the Design Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). double-click Level 9. If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results.

you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. under Views (all).In this exercise. clear Curtain Panels. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. volume. double-click {3D}. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. click Modify. When you select levels. and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Curtain Systems.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 8 On the Design Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. and Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. perimeter. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 637 . select all levels. 4 Click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Levels 1-4. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Modify. and select the three 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements and the mirrored 150' x 15' x 35' box masses as shown. 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.14 On the Options Bar. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 225' x 30' x 60' box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 639 . clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). click Mass Floors. select Level 1. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog.

press and hold SHIFT. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Add.In this exercise.rvt. Floor Volume. under Available fields. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Floor Perimeter. under Category. select Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Mass Floor. and select Level. schedules can be created using the mass floors. and click OK. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method. The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Sort by. select Mass: Family and Type. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. and click OK. Mass Family Box-Training: 50'x60'x40' Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 641 . for Usage. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. enter Retail.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

under Scheduled fields (in order). 14 Select Level. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. After you assign usage. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 150'x15'x35' Box-Training: 225'x30'x60' Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 35'x50'x25' Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Move Up until Level is listed second. under Other. select Mass: Family and Type. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. click Edit. and click Remove. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected.

enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 16 On the Formatting tab. select Usage. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. click Edit. for Filter. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Then by. and click Properties. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 643 . 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Field formatting. click Edit. 27 Click OK twice. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Floor Area. 24 In the Project Browser. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK twice. under Other. and click OK. and click OK. in the field under Filter by. elevation. under Fields. select Usage. for Sort by. 22 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. and select Grand totals. for Filter by. 18 On the Filter tab. and in the field below. under Other. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level. enter Hotel. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. and click Rename. for Filter. 23 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and plan views. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule.

you created mass floor schedules. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. the floor area. click Roof by Face. by level. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. The mass floor schedules list. floor perimeter.rvt. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs. double-click {3D}. under Views (all).

7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element family. 5 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic . Your model should now look as shown. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 645 .12". and also on the top faces of the 150' x 15' x 35' box mass elements.4 In the Type Selector. click Create Roof.

11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. select Sloped Glazing. and click OK. Curtain Systems. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. in the Type Selector. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Curtain Panels. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. click Create Roof. 13 Using the same method. 12 On the Options Bar.

click Create System. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. verify that Select Multiple is selected. select Curtain System : 5' x 5'.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 647 . click Curtain System by Face.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 649 . click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method.

In this exercise.rvt. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

click Modify. Roofs. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. you resize one of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. under Views (all). and then click OK. Next. Curtain Systems. clear Exclude Design Options. Floors. clear Curtain Panels. under Floor Plans.1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and Walls. 7 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 651 . and click (Element Properties). 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 105'0". 6 On the Design Bar. for Width.

652 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 On the View Control Bar.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.

click OK. click Remake. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront.TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 Select the roof as shown. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Editing Elements Created from Massings | 653 . you want to select the smaller one. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake. 654 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake.18 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 655 . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

right-click {3D}. 656 | Chapter 17 Massing . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 4 Rename the view 3D . click All to select all categories.Massing only.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.

You might create the model shown. such as columns and an extruded roof. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 657 . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired.In this exercise. This concludes the massing tutorial.

658 .

the host group is also updated automatically. In another exercise. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You mirror one instance of the group. When you make changes to a nested group. you also simplify the modification process. you not only simplify their placement. 659 . and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and typical office layouts. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. all instances in the building model are updated. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. hotel rooms. Creating. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. After you create a model group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. The new group is considered nested within the host group. For example. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. or with those working on a different project. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and modify repetitive units. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. place. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. By grouping objects. In this tutorial. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Modifying. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise.

2 Click in the drawing area. and double-click First Floor. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Views (all). and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 661 .3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar.

12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 663 .

15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy. click (Mirror). 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

Creating and Placing a Group | 665 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

click Save As. you make changes to an instance of a group. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group | 667 . When you finish editing.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt.

press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance.). press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click to select the wall. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. select the element.3 Click (Group Member.). 4 Move the cursor over the door. 7 Click (Group Member. click Modify. NOTE To display an excluded element.).).

click Door. 12 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 13 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 669 . move the cursor to the left. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.

select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. move the cursor up. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. In edit group mode. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 In the drawing area.16 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group.

29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. created in an earlier lesson. enter 7'. you add the Typical Kitchen group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 28 On the group editor toolbar. (Element Properties). and click OK. click Finish. under Constraints. enter 3' 4''. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.24 On the Design Bar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click 27 For Base Offset. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 25 Select the opening. for Unconnected Height. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups | 671 . which acts as the host.

in the Project Browser. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 5 In the drawing area.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Add to Group). under Floor Plans. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group.

double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 673 . 7 On the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.

you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. In the next exercise. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as door and window tags. such as text. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. and filled regions. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. you add door tags to a group. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail Group | 675 . 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and select the text note and the filled region. as shown. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and click OK. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). click Text. 9 On the Options Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. 16 In the drawing area. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.

24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. 22 On the Design Bar. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 677 . Because the detail group contains variables. click Modify. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. double-click Second Floor.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Groups. expand Detail. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

manner that a drawing component can be added. under Floor Plans. as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 678 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. clear Leader. double-click First Floor. click Modify.

Using Attached Detail Groups | 679 . under Floor Plans. click Check None. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Group). select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Filter dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name.

14 On the Options Bar. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Training File 680 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Place Detail. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Saving and Loading Groups | 681 . Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. In this case. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. expand Groups. and click Open. A warning dialog displays. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 12 On the Design Bar. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click OK. and expand Model. 5 In the New Project dialog.rvt. under Groups\Model. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Create Instance. click Desktop. accept the default template file. click Modify. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. browse to the Desktop. 3 For File name. and click Save Group. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. select 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Save. verify that Project is selected.

20 On the Options Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. select the linked Revit model. click Bind. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Revit Links.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 682 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and the link is removed. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Modify. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and click OK. When a group is converted to a link.rvt. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 18 In the Project Browser. click Use Existing. click OK. click Remove Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Link.

You add property lines manually. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 683 . and then modify the data.Site 19 In this tutorial. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you add a building pad to the site. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the final exercises. and walkways. convert the data to a table.

click Toposurface. 684 | Chapter 19 Site .The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method. 3 On the Design Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. expand Views (all). click Point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Site. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The scale of this view is 1" = 20'. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Training Files. and click Site. and open Imperial\i_First_Project.rvt This project file was created using the default imperial template. In the second part of this exercise. enter an absolute elevation of 10' 0". 4 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The circle should be approximately 150' wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 685 .5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.

9 Add a concentric circle of 20' 0" elevation points inside the 10' 0" contour. and click OK. 40'. 50'. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. enter an absolute elevation of 20' 0". 11 On the Design Bar. under Additional Contours. 10 Repeat the previous step for 30'. under Increment. click Site Settings. Use the following illustration as a reference. and 60' absolute elevations. enter 5' 0". 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Surface. 12 On the Settings menu.8 On the Options Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.

and double-click South. Creating a Toposurface | 687 . 16 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and press ENTER. click to delete it. 14 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). under Views (all). 15 On the View Control Bar. (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 3' 0". click the elevation value.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Before importing the contour data. on the Standard toolbar. 18 In the Project Browser. click to view it at various angles.

688 | Chapter 19 Site . and press ENTER. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. click Pin Position. under Views (all).21 Click the Level 2 text. it is considered an import symbol. double-click Site. 23 Click the Level 1 text. rename the level Basement. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and press ENTER. click Yes. For Layers. select Preserve. select Specify. 24 In the Project Browser. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. Verify that Current view only is not selected. For Colors. Click Open. 28 On the Design Bar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Training Files. rename the level Base Site Elevation. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and click OK. Until it is exploded.

click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics. select it. 34 Under Visibility. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 32 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. when the edges highlight. and then click OK. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Creating a Toposurface | 689 . 36 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear Elevations.

Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 42 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. clear C_INDX. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.When you select the import symbol. and click OK. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click (Default 3D View). 40 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours.

select Create property lines by sketching. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. do so before continuing. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. this project file is required in its current state. Using the first method. Using the second method. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Site-in progress. double-click Site. Adding Property Lines | 691 . 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Click Modify. On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. and click OK. you add property lines using two methods.rvt. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. under Floor Plans.44 Navigate to your preferred folder. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Adding Property Lines In this exercise.rvt. click Property Line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. name the project Site-in progress. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 691.

9 In the warning dialog. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click 12 On the Design Bar. select the lines. select Edit Table. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. to delete them. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 8 On the Options Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Property Line. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. when they highlight. and click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .

14 In the Property Lines dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 16 Click OK. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 350' 0" S 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" W 350' 0" N 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click to place the property lines. 15 Starting in Row #1. If the gap is not closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Adding Property Lines | 693 . The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.

NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Visibility/Graphics. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 23 On the View menu. and click OK. Before adding property line segment tags. 30 On the View Control Bar. The tags display more prominently in this view. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. clear Leader. right-click in the Design Bar. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Drafting. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 On the Options Bar.Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 25 Under Visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 In the Tags dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In this exercise. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 20 Click Load. click to place it.rfa. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Civil\Property Line Tag.dwg and click OK. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you created two sets of property lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the Imported Categories tab. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 22 In the Tags dialog. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. In the final step. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.

10 Under Additional Contours. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select Topography. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. click Site Settings. Under Line Color. 2 On the Settings menu. under Contour Line Display. specify the following values: ■ Under Start. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 695 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. specify an interval of 2' 0" passing through elevation 0' 0". select a shade of Brown. In the Object Styles dialog. click Object Styles. Under Line Pattern. enter 3' 0". enter the name Working Contour. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Dash dot. click New. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.rvt. for Subcategory. and click OK. Site-in progress. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog.In the next exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 4 Under Modify Subcategories.

You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 11 Click OK. The next exercise requires a new training file. Under Subcategory. select Working Contour. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 697. parking areas. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . select Single Value.■ ■ Under Range Type. In the next exercise. Working Contour. In this exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . click Lines. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.rvt. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Subregion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Site. you create subregions in order to define roads. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and islands. parking areas.Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. click Training Files. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. try to replicate the location and proportion. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. such as material.

When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK. 698 | Chapter 19 Site .TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.Asphalt for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . and click to open the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Materials dialog. click Properties. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. under Materials and Finishes. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click OK. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 24' wide. the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide. under Identity Data. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click the value for Material. enter Parking for Name. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions, they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 18' deep to accommodate parking spaces.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 699

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. In this training project, additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion, you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

700 | Chapter 19 Site

23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

24 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

30 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 701

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass, and apply the material Site - Grass.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar, click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway, and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete - walkway.

702 | Chapter 19 Site

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 703

39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 704.

Grading the Toposurface
In this exercise, you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. When you use the grading tool, the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface.

704 | Chapter 19 Site

3 On the Options Bar, click

(Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 767. 6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface.

Grading the Toposurface | 705

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

10 Press DELETE.

706 | Chapter 19 Site

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished, and new.

11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Grading the Toposurface | 707

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar, click Point. 15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 18' 0". 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

17 On the Design Bar, click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

18 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

708 | Chapter 19 Site

20 On the View toolbar, click to view it at various angles.

(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu, click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify Existing for Phase, and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore, only the original toposurface displays, because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project, you can delete it. 23 Select the toposurface, and delete it. 24 On the View menu, click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify New Construction for Phase, and click OK. Only the graded topography displays.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Building Pad on page 709.

Adding a Building Pad
In this exercise, you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element, nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad, it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

Adding a Building Pad | 709

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad. NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

710 | Chapter 19 Site

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new building pad.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Site Components on page 712.

Adding a Building Pad | 711

Adding Site Components
In this exercise, you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector, select Parking Space: 9' x 18' - 90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

712 | Chapter 19 Site

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

8 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

Adding Site Components | 713

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

714 | Chapter 19 Site

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

15 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adding Site Components | 715

Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 716. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. click Apply. Site tutorial-in progress. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. double-click Site.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Hidden Line. 716 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Click again to the left to position the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. In the following exercise. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. outside of the site. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 717 . NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. to position the shoulder of the leader. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left.

11 On the Design Bar. 718 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 719.■ Clear Leader. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 719 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click Modify.

click Tile. and click Add. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. under Views (all). The parking schedule is displayed. select Type. If necessary. 5 Under Available fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 6 Click the Formatting tab. and under Heading. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 720 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. 9 On the Window menu. 4 Under Available fields. enter Space. 7 Under Fields. 11 On the Window menu. and click OK. 8 Under Fields. double-click Site. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Size. select Mark. select Type. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Close Hidden Windows. and click OK. 12 In the Site plan. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. select Parking for Category. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Mark. and under Heading.

number the first three spaces consecutively. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Space. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 721 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.13 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

722 .

Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. In this tutorial. select the desired workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Using Worksharing. After the project is shared. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. such as annotations and dimensions.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. All other team members can view this workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Elements specific to a view. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. floors. doors. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you specify an active workset. When you are working on a shared project. stairs. however. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you must first enable Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. called Worksharing. and so on. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. use Element Borrowing. and click Editable. go to the Worksets dialog. 723 . This prevents possible conflicts within the project. such as walls. To make a workset editable. they cannot make changes to it. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.

This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Team size 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Instead. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. After learning the fundamentals. you can select which worksets are open or closed. When setting up Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. In the next exercise. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. such as a tenant interior. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In a multi-story structure. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required.

Shared Levels and Grids. and View worksets. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. On this tab. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Experience has shown that. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. designers work in teams. with each assigned a specific functional task. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. not including the Project Standards. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 725 . Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. In most projects. Regardless of the default setting. for a typical project. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Team member roles Typically. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. You should have at least one workset for each person. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. When you create a new workset. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. As new members create worksets for their own use. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. within the local file. the file is saved as the central file. you should then save to your local file. When you save to the central file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. proceeds as usual. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. if a workset named Interior was created. Therefore. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. your changes are saved.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. Generally. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When you save locally (to your local file). you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you can select which workset is active. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. However. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This makes them available to other team members. As you work. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. For example. you make that workset editable by you. On the Options Bar. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. however.

save to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Alternatively. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this conceptual exercise. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. for instance.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. and then save the local file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. reload the latest changes from the central file. make any required worksets editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 727 . or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. and make that workset editable. you should check out the Materials workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. When working remotely. using VPN. In this situation. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. In this instance. To do this.

728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and open Common\c_Worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.rvt. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.In the next exercise. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and notice all are editable by you. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Show. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 3 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog displays. Your username displays as the present owner. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. click Training Files. click Worksets. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.

expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click OK. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. select Workset1. For training purposes. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. You do. clear Visible by default in all views. In this simple training project. however. For example. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. clear Families. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and Views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the Rename dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 16 In the drawing area. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. expand Floor Plans. ■ 5 Under Show. click New. another is assigned the interior layout. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. currently named Workset1. 8 Click OK. Therefore. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. it is better to make them visible by default. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this training file. type the name Exterior Shell. 9 Click New. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. a small number of team members are working on the building model. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Only User-Created worksets should display. 14 In the Worksets dialog. When you initially activate Worksharing. In this case. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 729 . Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 12 Click Rename. imagine four users including yourself. Project Standards. you can rename the default workset.When you enable worksharing. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset.

click the Worksets tab. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click Visibility/Graphics. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. 19 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. including the interior doors. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements.17 On the Options Bar. stairs. 20 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. click . click . 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 29 Click OK. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and walls. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 26 On the View menu. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click the Worksets tab. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 43 Click OK. and click OK. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 34 In the drawing area. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. double-click Level 2. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click Close. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If any interior elements remain. 33 In the Project Browser. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 731 . 35 On the Options Bar. 44 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 39 Click Save. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click Non Editable. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. In this exercise. 38 In the Save As dialog. click Worksets. 32 Select Interior Layout. click . you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 30 On the View menu. click Save As.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Now that you have created the central file. select all of the interior elements of the building model. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.

any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Next. and click OK. and select Specify. you create your local file. and double-click Level 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. 2 In the Open dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout. click Worksets. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. please do so before continuing. click Open.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. In addition. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. and click OK. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout for Name. Before working on the model. and click Save. 11 In the Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). In this case. 7 In the Save As dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 12 Click OK. make modifications to the building model. click Save As. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 13 On the Window menu. expand Floor Plans. click Options. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 728. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 6 On the File menu. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. You have created a local file which is for your use only. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. check out worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 4 Click Open. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and select Yes for Editable. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select the central file.

but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. however. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . 21 On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. click Worksets. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. If this is selected. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Working Individually with Worksets | 733 . you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. In the Worksets dialog. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click . On the Options Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 20 Under Constraints. 23 On the File menu. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. notice the Editable Only option. and click OK. If it was owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. Because this element is not owned by another user. 22 Click OK. In this case.

30 Using the following illustration as a guide.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Wall. 34 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. 31 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Modify. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. click Door. 26 Delete the door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.

Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. By default. you should perform regular saves. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you should relinquish all worksets. Borrowed Elements is selected. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. save to central. a tooltip. click Save to Central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. displays the workset as well as the element type. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. When working in your local file. You modified the building model. In this particular case. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In this exercise. each user must check out worksets. and reload the latest changes. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Throughout the process. add two door openings into the rooms you created. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. For training purposes. two users access the central file through a network connection. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you created your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. checked out worksets. make elements editable. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and save locally immediately afterward. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 735 . In addition. which matches the information in the Status Bar. leave this file open in its current state. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. it is recommended. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Whenever you save.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. At the end of a work session. please do so before continuing. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.

11 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and reset the Username to your computer login name. specifically sequenced. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 7 In the Open dialog. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Options. In the following section of this exercise. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 15 On the File menu. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 4 Click the General Tab and. click Options. In addition. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. User 2: Create a local file. return to the Settings dialog. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. click Save As. 12 In the Save As dialog. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. one user has already created a local file. and click OK. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. skip the following section. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Worksets. select the central file. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and select Specify. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. click Open. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. instructions are staggered. enter User 2. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button.rvt. This is a system setting. For training purposes. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. under Username. 9 Click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Yes for Editable. and click Save.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. consider that person to be User 1. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This file is for your use only. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 3 On the Settings menu.

” 29 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. 19 On the File menu. 27 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. open it now. User 1: Check out worksets.You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. it becomes the active workset. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. and select Yes for Editable. If you only have one workset checked out. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. expand Views (all). 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 17 Click OK. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 737 . expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. modify the building model. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 23 Click OK.

under Floor Plans. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 738 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.” 35 Click OK. 41 On the File menu. click Save to Central. When you save to central. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. 42 Select Furniture Layout. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 33 On the File menu. click Reload Latest.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. The changes User 2 made are apparent. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Before adding any furniture. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 46 In the Project Browser. Click Yes. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 37 On the File menu. click Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu.” 39 Click OK. 44 In the Project Browser. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and click Rename. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. under Views (all). User 1: Reload latest worksets. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you should create a furniture plan view.

under Show. click Reload Latest. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Therefore. 61 Click OK 2 times. the Visible by default option was not selected. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. click the Worksets tab. and click Element Properties. are placed under Project Standards. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 66 On the File menu. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Component. choose any desk. 49 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Modify. and click inside any room. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. NOTE System families. 53 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 739 . and click OK. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. such as Wall Types. 62 On the File menu. 65 Click OK.” 55 Click OK. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central.200mm. enter Exterior Wall . 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. rather than Families. select Project Standards. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. 50 On the View menu. 59 In the Type Properties dialog.

At the appropriate point in this exercise. 70 On the File menu. modified the building model. click Options. select the following. and click OK. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 740. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 3 In the Save As dialog. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and published their changes back to the central file. 740 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Each user checked out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. and save 69 On the File menu. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Each user must have network access to the central file. select Save to Central. throughout this training. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. User 1: Reload latest. There are specific instructions for each user. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. click Save As. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. leave this file open in its current state. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This exercise requires two users and. finished the previous workset exercises. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Checking out worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. select Reload Latest. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). As each of you work. you save the training file as a central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and these problems are rectified.rvt. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. leave this file open in its current state. and still have your local files open. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In subsequent steps. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.

7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click Save. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 741 . select the central file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 15 Click Open. Next. This is the local file for User 1. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select Make this a Central File after save. Set the Username to User 2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK. and click OK. 12 On the File menu. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. click Options. 18 In the Save As dialog. 17 On the File menu. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 6 On the File menu. 5 Click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition. click Options. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. click Open. return to the Settings dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. click Save As. and select Specify. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. On the Settings menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. The central file should still be open.

the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 27 Under Active Workset. double-click Level 1. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select Exterior Shell. 30 On the left exterior wall. and then click OK. 22 In the Worksets dialog. Afterwards. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 29 On the Options Bar. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. At this point. 24 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and then click OK. click Worksets. verify that Editable Only is cleared. under Floor Plans. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select the second window from the top. After you submit the request. 742 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. click the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select Interior Layout. and click Open. and click Editing Requests. select them. 26 In the Worksets dialog. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable.

and the other user granted it. select the request submitted by User 2. to Local. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Check Now. In this case. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 743 . click Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. select the following. In this multi-user exercise.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. you requested permission to edit the element. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. 36 Click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. 35 Click Grant.

744 .

745 . and each option set can have multiple schemes. At any time in the design process. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In this tutorial. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options. Using design options.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the second exercise. under Option Set. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can edit it. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you design each of the structural options. After you create a design option. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. With the second option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. therefore. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you set up multiple design option sets. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the first exercise in this lesson. each is constructed for interchangeability. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. TIP In this exercise.In this particular case. click New. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. make your final design decision. click Training Files. The client has asked you to create various options. In the final exercise of this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.rvt. the only available command is to create a new option set.

5 On the View menu. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. expand Floor Plans. click Column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. click Modify. By selecting Multiple. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Edit Selected. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. and click Close. select: ■ ■ ■ . 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. In this case. add three columns. In the following illustration. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 4 In the Project Browser. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 7 In the Type Selector.3 Select Option 1 (primary). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and the third column centered between the two. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 11 On the Edit toolbar. TIP To center the middle column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click 12 On the Options Bar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns.

When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. A copy of the three selected columns is added. they are difficult to see in this view.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 17 Zoom out and. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. click .

The first click specifies the beam start point. select Round Bar : 2". Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom in on the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. In it. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF CORE. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Next. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.

click . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. 30 On the View toolbar. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar.

and click OK. 46 Under Option. under Option. click Rename. under Option Set. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 33 Click Finish Editing. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. name the option Louvers. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Structure for New. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 38 In the Rename dialog. click New. There should now be two roofing design options. 45 Under Roofing. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. under Option. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Creating the Structural Design Options | 751 . enter Brackets for New. click Rename. click New. and click OK. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. not a new option set. enter Beam for New. under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 41 Under Option Set. 32 In the Design Options dialog.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). under Option.

752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. This allows you to more easily manage the project. click Rename. name the option Sunscreen. 52 Click Close. under Structure. and click OK. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Floor Plans. select Option 2. double-click ROOF TERRACE. it will resemble the following illustration. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 51 Under Edit.47 Under Roofing. 53 In the Project Browser. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. When finished. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Beam. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 48 Under Option. select Edit Selected. Under Now Editing. you create the second design option.

59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu. click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 753 . click Component. select Roof Beam. 56 In the Type Selector. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration.

The second click represents the move end point. on the Edit toolbar. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 755 . 69 Click Close.rvt. Notice that even before you close the dialog. which is visible by default. 67 On the Tools menu. name the file. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 70 On the File menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog. click . 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. click Finish Editing. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. and click Save. 66 On the View toolbar. i_Urban_House-in progress. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you need this file in its current state. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise.

7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.In this exercise. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . each with multiple design options to pick from.rvt. you set up multiple design option sets. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. select Rafter 2 x 10. Under Now Editing. select Louvers (primary). do so now. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. the other for beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. 2 On the Tools menu. With the second option. In the next exercise. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Component. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Sunscreen. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. 4 Under Edit. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). you design each of the roofing options. click Edit Selected. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. open it now. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. If you need to add dimensions. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. under Roofing. a Louver system. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 5 Click Close. The first option. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Type Selector. The second roofing system. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 3 In the Design Options dialog.

click Modify. enter 38' 6" for Length. Enter 5 for Number. Select 2nd for Move To. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. under Other. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 757 . 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Array. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays. For example. you can enter 3 3. rather than entering 3' 3". 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. and press ENTER. The space separates feet and inches. TIP When entering a dimension value.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

27 For the array starting point.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 34 for Number. click Component. and click OK. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. 20 In the Type Selector. and click Array. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 1’. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. select Louver 2 x 6. click Modify. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. when the listening dimension displays. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 759 . and. 25 With the louver still selected. and press Enter. click . under Other. and select the louver you just placed.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system is complete.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. under Edit. click . 29 On the View toolbar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 30 On the Tools menu.

and double-click West. 33 Under Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 761 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 40 On the Options Bar. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. You will fix this in a later step. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and the third point defines the arc. 41 Select the top of the left column. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Roofing. then you can modify it through the dimension. 34 In the Project Browser. click . You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click Edit Selected. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click Properties. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. The first two points define the ends of the line. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. the top of the next column on the right. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. select Sunscreen. In this case. Click OK. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 43 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Therefore. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and then click Close. expand Elevations.

and then click Close. 48 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 51 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system is complete. Select the right arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Under Constraints. The second roofing system. Sunscreen. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click . you designed each of the roofing options. you need this file in its current state. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then the center arc. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 50 On the Tools menu. click Finish Editing. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. click Save. Under Constraints. a Louver system.44 In the Element Properties dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 52 On the File menu. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The arcs should connect. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In this exercise. 49 On the View toolbar. 46 On the Tools menu. 45 Click OK. click Trim/Extend. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. under Edit. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. The first option. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 762 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Finish Sketch.

make it part of the building model. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. After exploring the combinations. double-click Primary Option. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. double-click Secondary Option. and last options. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. tertiary. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). under 3D Views. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. do so now. you select a design. 9 Click OK. under Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 4 In the Project Browser.Managing Design Options In this exercise. Managing Design Options | 763 . Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click the Design Options tab. secondary. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and delete the discarded design options. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 5 Right-click each of the copies. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). and click Duplicate.

click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. double-click Tertiary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. and click OK.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 19 On the View menu. and click OK. 15 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). 764 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views.

Managing Design Options | 765 . and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 24 Under Option. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the beam option becomes part of the model. 29 Select Roofing. the current primaries are no longer options. 22 On the Tools menu. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. This was the client choice for structural. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 30 Under Option Set. select Make Primary. In this case. 26 Under Option Set. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 23 In the Design Options dialog. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. In your design options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. double-click Primary Option. click Close. since you no longer need them. 25 Select Structure. click Delete. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click Yes. click Accept Primary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. The set is deleted. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 27 In the alert dialog.At this point. click Delete to remove the views that used options. Because the client has selected the design option. An alert is displayed. select Beam. click Yes.

In this exercise. made it part of the building model. you selected a design. 766 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. After exploring the combinations. 35 On the File menu. click Save. and deleted the discarded design options.

You create new phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. This changes room definition and total building model area. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. 767 . For the client. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. demolish existing construction. then add new walls and doors in a different location. demolish existing walls and doors. complete with schedules.

5 Select any of the exterior walls. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. under Phasing.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Training Files. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. If you wish to do so. regardless of phase. click (Element Properties). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. click Modify. 4 Click Cancel. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. go to the Settings menu. are visible in this view. When you create a new project. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. define the units. In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. This means that all building model elements. under Phasing. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. and click OK. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Project Units. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you add new elements to the building model. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and open Common\c_Phasing. expand Views (all). 7 Click Cancel. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. During the demolition and renovation process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans.

draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. TIP If this were a multi-story building. right-click Level 1 . 11 In the Filter dialog.Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Because this is a phase-specific view. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Existing. 16 In the Rename dialog. clear Door Tags. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. click Modify. under Phasing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Demo. 10 On the Options Bar. including the door tags. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. enter Level 1 . click . under Floor Plans.Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. all of the building model elements. for Phase Created. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Because this is a renovation project. select Existing. and click Rename. click (Filter Selection). and click OK.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 . 20 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. are highlighted in red. After you release the mouse button. right-click Level 1. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. After you create the views. 17 Click No. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. under Floor Plans. Phasing Your Model | 769 . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

Existing. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. new construction occurs after existing construction. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Phase status is time-dependent. however. select Overridden. and Temporary. You may need to zoom in to see this. In this case. under Phasing. to which all the building model elements belong. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. under Floor Plans. you modify these settings. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Later in this exercise.Demo.Existing. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. click the Phase Filters tab. There are five default phase filters. 26 In the Phasing dialog. 29 For Composite Plan. On a logical time line. Next. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Notice that the line pattern is still gray. select Existing. for Phase. 24 In the Project Browser. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 28 Under Filter Name. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Demolished. 27 Click New. enter Composite Plan. under New. Because of this time relationship. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 21 In the Project Browser.

select the interior walls one at a time. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. or you can use the demolish tool. under Floor Plans. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. under Cut ➤ Lines. double-click Level 1 . select the line style. you begin demolition. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select Demolished. 42 In the Project Browser. As you click each wall. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. you demolish all elements hosted by it. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click (Demolish). There are two ways to demolish an element. 35 Click OK twice. Next. When you demolish the host. Phasing Your Model | 771 . 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. click the value for Color. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 36 Using the same method. 32 In the Demolished row. click OK. its display changes to a red dashed line. 34 In the Color dialog. 39 In the Phasing dialog. double-click Level 1 . select a lighter blue.Existing. select red. under Floor Plans.31 Under Phase Status.Demo. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

772 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 51 Add a door leading into each room. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 Open Level 1 . 50 In the Type Selector. for Phase Filter. 53 Open Level 1 . 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Demo. add a long horizontal wall. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 49 On the Design Bar. click Door. select Show Previous + New. for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Wall.Existing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Phasing.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. The demolished walls no longer display. under Phasing. 47 In the Type Selector.

and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.New. click (Default 3D View). All elements are displayed in this view. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.Demo. regardless of phase. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . and existing shows as half-tone. which are displayed as red. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 60 On the View toolbar. new is shown in blue.New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Phasing Your Model | 773 . 61 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The renovated building model plan is displayed. 62 If necessary. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Open Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . 57 In the Project Browser.

In the next exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Notice that this view is the original building model. the rooms change in both definition and size. demolition. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. click Training Files. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. 3 Open Level 1 .New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you wish to do so. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and click OK. If you wish to save this file. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. therefore.rvt.Demo. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1 . 774 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this exercise. In this view. 2 Open Level 1 . room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. expand Floor Plans. go to the Settings menu. sizes. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. click Project Units. 63 Close the file. you can do so at this time. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and locations change depending on the phase of the project.Existing. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. As the renovation process continues. and new construction. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. In this view. define the units. you can see the new walls added to the building model. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. You can also see that the room quantities. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. yet they have different room numbers. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar.New.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 13 Open Level 1 . click Room. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room.Demo. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.Existing. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 6 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view. 5 Click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click Room Tag. click in each room as you move to the right. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. In the Phasing dialog. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 775 .

This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. In addition. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.New Construction. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 18 Open Room Schedule .Existing. 17 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. The two schedule views tile. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 776 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View phase-specific room schedules. In this exercise. In this case. expand Schedules/Quantities. 16 In the Project Browser. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 19 On the Window menu. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. and double-click Room Schedule . click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.

In this tutorial. 777 . performance. Comparison of alternatives on a site. You position the building models on the site plan. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In these situations. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. modify their visibility. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. This maximizes efficiency. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project. In the final lesson.

One building model is a condominium.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. modify their visibility. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You position the building models on the site. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link two building models to the project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.

NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Save As. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. select the three files.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the File menu. Manual . and click OK.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . click Close. right-click. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. All three files now reside. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. however. c_Townhouse. Otherwise. and open Common\c_Site. this system is not exposed to the user. click Open. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . you can do so. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. ■ ■ Manual . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 795. c_Condo_Complex. Select c_Site. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click Properties. RELATED See the lesson. with write permission. in the Model Linking folder that you created. This option is grayed out. click Training Files. and save the file there. 5 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location.rvt. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Auto . click Open.■ Auto . 8 Clear Read-only.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.

780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. expand Views (all). Notice the blue detail lines. expand Floor Plans. For Positioning.Origin to Origin. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.■ Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . 13 Click Open. 11 On the File menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and double-click Level 1.

the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The linked model moves as one object. click (Move). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 781 . The second click specifies the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The first click specifies the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 16 For the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint. The Move command requires two clicks.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 15 On the Edit toolbar. After you specify the location to move to.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. For Positioning. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.18 On the View menu.Origin to Origin. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 21 Click Open. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. and select c_Townhouse. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. select Auto .

click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. when the vertical line displays. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 783 . you first specify the rotation start point.23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. In this case.

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 30 For the starting point. click (Copy). select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 785 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

click . for Name. click (Default 3D View). 34 On the Options Bar. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Identity data. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 37 On the View toolbar. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. and click OK. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. click Rotate. enter Townhouse A.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. click (SteeringWheels). click Save. click and hold Orbit. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model.38 On the File menu. When you originally linked the files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 787 . they were placed too low within the site topography. After linking the files. In this exercise. In the next exercise.

6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. click (Align). 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. In this case. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. you first select the plane you want to align to. When using the Align command. when it highlights. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. In the steps that follow. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the plane that you want to align. and click to select the line. To do this.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click to select it. Click the Revit Links tab. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. expand Elevations. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click OK. under Views (all). move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 789 . double-click North. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 15 On the File menu. click (Default 3D View). This would over-constrain the model. 12 On the View toolbar. click and hold Orbit. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click Save. under Elevations. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. (SteeringWheels). 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click 13 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project.

790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 For Annotation Categories. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. select <Custom>. click Custom. double-click South. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. do so before continuing. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 9 Under Visibility. As you can see.rvt. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 10 Click OK. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. If the Basics page is set to Custom. detail level. under Elevations. When you link a file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By linked view. In this exercise. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 4 Under Visibility. click the Revit Links tab. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 2 On the View menu. click By Host View. you can independently control the visibility settings. display settings. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. or Custom. In the next exercise. click OK. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. you need this project file open and in this view. scroll down and clear Levels. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. click Visibility/Graphics. expand c_Townhouse.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 791 . on the Basics tab. and then set the detail level to coarse. 23 In the Model categories list. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility. double-click Level 1. click the Revit Links tab. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. click Visibility/Graphics. By default. Using the Custom option. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 14 On the View menu. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. In this case. select Custom. 24 Click OK. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.rvt. 20 For c_Townhouse. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. You can click the value for Detail Level. By selecting custom under Model Categories. under Floor Plans. or fine. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. click By Host View. no detail level changes are required. expand c_Townhouse. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. under Display Settings. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. medium. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. With linked files. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. and click OK. select <Custom>.

you manage the linked files. However. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Save. In most cases. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. under Visibility.rvt. select c_Townhouse. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. In this case. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. With the Show All filter applied. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. phase. click Custom for the Townhouse link. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. 29 Click OK. there are situations. All other components are grayed out. on a sloped site for instance. In this case. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. By default. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. you need this project file open and in this view. In the next exercise. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. 26 Under Display Settings. In this exercise. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. all new. existing. click OK. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. 31 On the File menu. and phase filter of a specific link. this is preferable. demolished.

and Saved Path fields are read only. 3 Under Path Type. 5 Click Unload. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. The default path type is Relative. 6 At the confirmation prompt. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 7 Click OK. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. 4 Under Linked File. the link is maintained. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. click Yes. click Manage Links. do so before continuing. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. In a shared coordinate environment.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. Notice the Loaded. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Managing Linked Building Models | 793 . select c_Condo_Complex. In general. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click the Revit tab. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. They supply information regarding the links. Locations Not Saved. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.

This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. the link is not loaded. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. expand Revit Links. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. 9 On the File menu. 8 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects.rvt. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. click the arrow next to the Open button. right-click c_Condo_Complex. When you initially place the link. If you choose not to open that workset. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. click Save As. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. and click Reload. To do this. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. However. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. and select Specify. In these cases.

TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). name the file Site_Project.10 In the Save As dialog. leave the project file open in its current view. and save it as an RVT file. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. you are establishing a shared origin point. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 795 . you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. When used in conjunction with model linking. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 778. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. The host file consists primarily of site components. In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. If you have not completed the previous lesson. do so before continuing. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. In the next lesson. In essence. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. When you share coordinates between projects. and the resulting project files. If you intend to complete the next lesson now.

It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 3 In the drawing area. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Open.coordinates are used. When you are working in the host project. and the resulting project files. If you have closed the project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. do so before continuing. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. open it before continuing. Select Site_Project. 2 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Condo Complex. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.rvt and click Open. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this case. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. If you have not completed the lesson. Linking Building Models on page 778.

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. even though both models originate from one linked file. click to select it. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. These three locations can be named Lot A. but can have multiple additional locations. select Location 1. you need this project file open and in this view. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. and Lot C. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. when the edges highlight. this location is not saved outside of the host project. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. In this exercise. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Lot B. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. 5 On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the exercise. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. do so before continuing. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. it is placed at a specific location. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. However. On the Status Bar. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 797 . This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. and click OK. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1.

under Instance Parameters. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Rename. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. enter Lot A for New. When constraining a link to a location. click Reconcile. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 12 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 4 Under Value. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. and click OK. select Move instance to.2 On the Options Bar. click . 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. In the Choose Location dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. Record the current position as a location. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Change. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. under Instance Parameters. 9 In the Select Location dialog. . 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. This is a one-time operation. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select the townhouse project. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. To explicitly save a location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. the active location position is moved. The first click specifies the move start point. When you relocate a project. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. select Save. When you release the mouse button. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 26 Click OK. 23 Click Save Locations. click Manage Links. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 799 . and the left townhouse resides at that location. a warning displays. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. and click OK. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. Save locations 21 On the File menu. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location.Notice the OK button is not active. This is a two-click process. click OK. The second click specifies the move endpoint. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click Duplicate. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. ignore the warning. or cancel the action. Because Lot A is currently in use. make sure Lot B is selected. When you create a location. click OK. click the Revit tab. you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. Record current position as. 19 In the Select Location dialog. and click OK. enter Lot B for Name. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. Notice the OK button is still not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. and click OK. By relocating a project. select the second option.

34 On the File menu. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 800 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Undo to return the origin to its original position. click Close. NOTE In the following exercise. select Save. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. click Save. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. you work in one of the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 33 On the Edit menu. and click OK. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 36 On the File menu. In this exercise. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.

select Auto . do so before continuing. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. under Floor Plans. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. click Open. Click Open. If you have not completed the exercises. double-click 1st Floor. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. In addition. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.rvt file. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Working with a Linked Building Model | 801 . For Positioning. 2 On the File menu. When opening the linked file. In this exercise. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Select c_Condo_Complex. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.By Shared Coordinates. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. The current active location is Lot A. it is placed automatically within the host project. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Because this building model only has one named location. Also. if other models were linked into the same host. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared.

Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 802 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Graphics. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. do so before continuing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. you create a new location. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. click Duplicate. enter Lot C. click View Properties. In the next exercise. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. orient a view to true north. In the host file. 6 Select Lot B. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. select True North for Orientation. and click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. If you have not completed the exercises. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Manage Place and Locations.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. click OK. In this exercise. In this exercise. and click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you manage the shared locations. you can select Lot C if necessary. you need this project file open and in this view. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. 3 In the Name dialog. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. and click Make Current. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. 7 Click OK.

9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. If you have not completed the exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 803 . you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You can save the file if you wish. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. In this exercise. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Select Site_Project. On the Options Bar. click Open. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 10 On the File menu. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. click Close.rvt and click Open. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.

6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. select Doors. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 804 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. 5 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. and click OK.

you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the File menu. You have completed this tutorial. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. click Save. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 805 . under Other. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities.8 Click OK. select Family and Type for Sort by. and then click OK twice. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 On the File menu. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and click Properties. right-click Door Schedule. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. clear Itemize every instance. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. In this exercise. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 12 Select Grand totals. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.

806 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 807 .

808 .

and your username when using worksets. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. Finally. which is independent of the project settings. journal cleanup options. 6 In the New Project dialog. 4 Under Colors. 809 . 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 3 In the Options dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. and click OK. selection default options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. In the first lesson. click Browse. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you create an office template. click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 In the New Project dialog. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Training Files.rte. they are not saved to project files or template files. and set it as your default template. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. notification preferences.

22 When prompted to save changes. 19 On the Design Bar. click Wall. 15 Click OK. For Selection color. However. clear Invert background color. click Modify. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 In the Color dialog. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. select yellow. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. 18 On the Design Bar. and select the wall. the elements causing the error display using this color. click the Graphics tab. select red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.rvt. click the value for Selection color. select None. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. click No. and open Imperial\i_Settings. 11 Under Colors. For Tooltip assistance. and click OK.10 In the Options dialog. 26 In the Options dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 14 Under Notifications. click Modify. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select One hour. 13 Click the General tab. click Training Files. When an error occurs. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open.

select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations on page 811. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. click Places. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. and click Browse to select a template. 3 Under Default template file. centralized. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. such as in a large. notice the list of library names. 8 Click Cancel. 2 In the Options dialog. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 10 In the Places dialog. you can start a new project with that template. select the folder to save your files to by default. select Normal. you specify default file locations. For Tooltip assistance. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. select your preferred Save reminder interval. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. click Browse. enter the name you want to use during worksharing.27 Click the General tab. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 811 . The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Under Username. and click Open. including your default project template. 4 Click Cancel. and family libraries. Your login name displays by default. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. click the File Locations tab. Under Journal File Cleanup. 5 Under Default path for user files. click Browse. These files are used in the software support process. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. family template files. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. do not save the changes. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. If prompted. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. However. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component.

that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. saving. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. In the following illustration. and select it as the library path. and click Open. click (Add Value). 11 In the Places dialog. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and change the name to My Library. or loading a Revit Architecture file. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.library names and path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click the icon side of the field. under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. When you are opening. templates. Save. and Import dialogs. or families. Load. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. and decal image files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. 28 Click OK. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. view the current path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Click Cancel.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 23 Select My Library. such as bump maps. custom color files. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options on page 813. 3 Under Settings. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. This path is determined during installation. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 22 Click Places. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. click My Library. Load. (Remove Value) to delete the library. If you work in a large office. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 9 In the text editor. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. and click OK twice. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 15 Under Library Name. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 2 In the Options dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 24 Click 25 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 813 . Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 5 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE.

3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Edit. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the Options dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 In the Options dialog.rte. click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. If prompted. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 19 Under Settings. click Restore Defaults. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Snap Settings on page 814. click Text. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click OK. click Browse. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you modify snap increments. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. delete sheetmtl-CU. click default template. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click the Spelling tab. click File menu ➤ Save. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 2 In the New Project dialog. work with snapping turned off.11 In the Options dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. do not save the changes. 21 In the text editor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modify snap settings. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. You can turn snap settings on and off. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click Training Files. In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. 22 In the text editor.

snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. TIP To zoom while sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.6 Under Dimension Snaps. click OK. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click Wall. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching.. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Modifying Snap Settings | 815 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and enter 1 . A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. clear Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. For example. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. use the wheel button on your mouse. 7 Under Object Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button.

25 Click File menu ➤ Close. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and the wall edges. it will snap to the endpoints. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and delete the value 1’ . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Do not set the wall end point. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Modifying Project Settings on page 817. 24 Click OK.This is the increment that you added previously. 21 Move the cursor downward. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 23 Under Dimension Snaps.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and do not save the file. and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. and click Wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 18 Enter SM.

When you apply a material to an element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. save the project file with a unique name. annotations. and open Imperial\i_Settings. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. click Training Files. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. and object styles. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Modifying Project Settings | 817 . lines. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Finally. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. fill patterns. You create and modify materials. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you render a region to observe the changes.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.rvt. Using these options. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. In the steps that follow. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. for Class. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 6 Click Replace. 10 Click the Graphics tab. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser.Fieldstone material. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. In the steps that follow. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and double-click 02 Entry Level. When a model element is loaded into a project. and texture of the material. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.Fieldstone. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. scale. These details will display in rendered images.Stone. In the Materials dialog. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. When you change properties of a render appearance. 11 Click OK. and click (Element Properties). Masonry . and select Masonry . and click OK.Fieldstone. 9 Click Apply. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. read-only library for render appearances. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and click OK. select Stone. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . In the next exercise. The properties describe the color. 3 Click (Duplicate). 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter Masonry . However. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.

click (Default 3D View). 17 For Structure. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 19 On the right side of the Material field.Fieldstone. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. . Fieldstone on CMU. select the rear exterior wall. click Model Graphics Style. 15 Click Duplicate.Brick. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.Fieldstone. 24 In the Type Selector. click This is the material that you created. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 23 While pressing CTRL. 25 On the View toolbar.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Materials dialog. click Edit. Creating and Applying Materials | 819 . When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. and click OK. click Edit/New. 16 Enter the new wall name. 22 Select the left exterior wall. and click OK. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 26 On the View Control Bar. 18 For Finish 1. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . select Masonry . click in the Material field.

30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. select the render region (a red rectangle). The rendering process begins. 31 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. select Low or Medium. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. right-click the Design Bar. 29 In the 3D view. and click Rendering. select Region. click Render. 28 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. When finished. under Quality.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. In the following exercise. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. click Rendering Dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar.

Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 821 . Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. in the Rendering dialog. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way.rvt. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting pattern density is fixed. and clear Region. click Show the model. Zoom into the model. expand Elevations. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. such as steel. click Show the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. and double-click West. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Then click Render again.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. i_Settings-in progress. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Training Files. click . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. (Element Properties).56. click Import. enter . 13 On the Options Bar. for Finish 1.Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.pat. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. select Custom. 8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. enter Fieldstone. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 11 Click OK. and click OK. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 9 Under Custom. select fldstn. 3 Under Pattern Type. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 5 Click New. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. click Edit/New. click in the Material field. 7 Under Custom.Fieldstone. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click Edit. 10 For Name. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 15 For Structure. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and for Import scale. choose Model.

In the Materials dialog. click to select a fill pattern. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 25 On the View toolbar. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 21 In the Materials dialog. For example. click OK.Fieldstone material. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click (Default 3D View). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. i_Settings-in progress. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.rvt. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. expand 3D Views. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles | 823 . 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles on page 823. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. there are often multiple window types within a project. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 22 Click OK three times. under Pattern Type. select Model. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. click Modify. 23 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3 Windows. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. TIP If the pattern does not display. you can set the window frame material to By Category.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 8 In the Materials dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). click Edit/New. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. under Materials and Finishes. and click .2 On the keyboard. click By Category. for Trim Exterior Material. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties). 9 Click OK twice. click Modify. click (Element Properties). click in the Value column. 16 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the arched window. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. and click 15 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). . 5 On the Options Bar. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 14 In the Materials dialog.

(Duplicate).Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.red paint. Controlling Object Styles | 825 . and click 20 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 25 In the search field. 23 Click Replace. or keywords include the word red. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 19 For Trim. for Class. and select Trim. enter Trim . for Name. type red. click in the Material column. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. select Paint. select Trim. . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. expand Windows. descriptions.

is open with the 3D view active. 31 On the View toolbar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim.rvt. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. click OK. click OK. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. and click OK.rvt. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 826.26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. When you render a 3D view. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 29 In the Materials dialog. i_Settings-in progress. enter Roof Line. i_Settings-in progress. (Default 3D view). Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 28 Under Shading. for Name. click New.

select Roof Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. 11 For Line Pattern. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 827 . select Roofs. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 For Line Color.6 Click OK twice. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click OK. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. under Category. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Red.

NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. double-click to Building. sections. Plans. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.13 In the Project Browser. but not the line pattern. click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click 03 Roof. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. elevations. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

30 For the Zoning Setback category. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 20 Click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. For Color. ■ Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 829 . 34 On the Options Bar. 18 For Line Color. under Modify Subcategories. Notice the site topography and the property lines. select Roofs. For Line Color. click Lines. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 For Name. For Line Pattern. select Black. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click Override. for Visibility. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. enter Zoning Setback. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. click New. 19 For Line Pattern. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 25 Click OK twice.16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. This places the line above the topography. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Red. select 5. select Blue. 31 Click OK. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Solid. 33 In the Type Selector. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Roofs. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select 2. under Floor Plans. select Roof Line. Click (Draw). select Zoning Setback. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. For Pattern. select Double Dash 5/8" .

expand Lines. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Expand Site. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If Site is not selected. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and clear Zoning Setback. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Modifying Annotations on page 831. and clear Zoning Setback. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. select it. double-click 02 Entry Level. 40 In the Project Browser. (Default 3D View). 39 Click OK. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View).■ Click (Line). and then clear Property Lines. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 36 On the View toolbar. 43 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. and clear Property Lines.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. For Units. select mm. Modifying Annotations | 831 . Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click one wall. click Dimension. (Undo). you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. select Millimeters. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. For Unit suffix.rvt. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 7 Click OK twice. You have created a new dimension style. click Duplicate. click the default value. 4 Enter the name Linear . To place a dimension.Metric.rvt. and place a dimension on the floor plan.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 5 Under Text. for Units Format.Metric and click OK. and then click outside the second wall. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click another wall. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. i_Settings-in progress. select Linear . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. i_Settings-in progress. click Modify.

14 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. scroll down to Windows. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. clear Leader. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. scroll to Windows and notice that Window Tag . and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag . Window Tag . 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 27 On the west wall. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Then press Delete. 19 Click Load. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 21 In the Tags dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. verify that Create is clear. under Category.rfa. 24 While pressing CTRL. 28 On the Design Bar.Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. select the 3 window tags. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Under Category. 18 In the Tags dialog. 16 Click Cancel. click the bottom window. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. In the preview image. click Tag All Not Tagged.Number is now the assigned tag. and click OK.Number. In the steps that follow. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. click Training Files.Number.Number. click Tag ➤ By Category. the other displays the instance value. 26 On the Options Bar.Number as the assigned tag. 30 Under Leader. notice Window Tags appears twice. Leave Window Tag . notice that the label displays 1i. 22 Under Loaded Tags. click Window Tag . 23 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click OK. and Detail Level Options | 833 . for Rounding. 6 Click OK. click the default value. 2 In the Project Units dialog.Temporary Dimensions. click the default value. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. and click OK.rvt. Specifying Units of Measurement. select Faces. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 32 On the View toolbar. For Unit symbol. 3 In the Format dialog. select To the nearest 1/16". In the first section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Temporary Dimensions. 8 Under Walls. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. Unless overridden. dimensions use these project settings. In this project. Specifying Units of Measurement. Click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you modify the detail level assignments. select Openings. for Length. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select SF. click Modify. 31 On the Design Bar. select 0 decimal places. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. dimension values display using this setting. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Specifying Units of Measurement. i_Settings-in progress. Unless overridden. you modify the temporary dimension settings. and Detail Level Options on page 833. you specify the project units of measurements. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. (Default 3D View). for Area. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. In the second section. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. In the final section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.

In this exercise. You do not select a view scale to move it. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834.When you create a new view and specify its view scale. 12 Click OK. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. click . TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and expand 3D Views. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Floor Plans. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. expand Views (all). In this table. Notice the 1/4" = 1’ 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.

notice that views are grouped by phase. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). expand both the Architectural and Structural views.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Discipline. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 14 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. select Type/Discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.2 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. under Sheets.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Modifying Project Browser Organization | 835 . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click Apply. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 5 On the Views tab. In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. expand each sheet set. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .

21 In the Project Browser. If you want to save this file. and click OK. navigate to your preferred directory. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. you create an office template. click the Folders tab. enter a unique file name.Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 Click the Views tab. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. View Type (Family and Type). and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click OK. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Creating an Office Template on page 837. under Views. and Discipline. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Proceed to the next lesson. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. In this lesson. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. expand 3D Views. and click OK. and click New. In the lesson that follows. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. expand Complete. 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline.

The template selection may vary depending on your installation. When you create new projects. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. close them. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. click Training Files. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. 12 Under Template File. when you create a new project. for Create new. select Project. and open Imperial\Templates. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. you select the starting point for your office template. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. For example. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and double-click North. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates.rte template. You can choose from several templates. 9 In the Project Browser. drag a zoom region around the level heads.Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Browse. 4 Select the Construction-Default. In that case. Whenever you create a new project or template. Creating an Office Template | 837 . A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. in the drawing area. and click Open. 5 In the New Project dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. dimensions styles. the same rules apply. levels. click Browse. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. If you have additional projects open. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and view names. 2 Under Template file.

you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.13 Select the default template. including color. you can select it now. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. When you create the material. During this exercise. Modifying System Settings on page 809. Observe the materials that are already defined. 2 Scroll down the materials list. weights. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For more details on modifying these settings. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. For example. Modifying Project Settings on page 838. specific modifications are not dictated. or refer to the online help. create and modify them as needed. and similar attributes. you modify the project settings for your new template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. When you create or modify a material. select Project template. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. or refer to the online help. see the previous lesson. 15 Under Create new. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. see Modifying Project Settings on page 817. In this exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 14 Click Open. and click OK. You do this by defining the render appearance. texture. TIP For more information about creating new materials. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. transparency.

annotation objects. rotate. 18 For existing line categories. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. or modify existing patterns. or line pattern as needed. 20 Click OK. and create new subcategories as needed. You can add and delete view scales. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. create new subcategories. see a preview of the rendered material. Modifying Project Settings | 839 . 9 Click OK when finished. 15 Modify categories. you can set line weights. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. See Modifying Project Settings on page 817 for more information on creating new fill patterns. line patterns. 13 If necessary. If you change render appearance properties. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights.3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and imported objects. the changes are saved as part of the project template. create new line subcategories. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. You can align. modify the line weight. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. In the Object Styles dialog. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. see Specifying File Locations on page 811. and move model patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 19 If necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. For more information. line colors. 4 Click Replace. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. line color. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and change render appearance properties. and materials for model objects. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed.

39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. name the style. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. To see the details of a particular style. and radial dimensions are modified separately. select it from this list. such as section lines and dimension lines. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 40 Click OK. 29 Click OK. 46 Click OK. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. and click Edit. Linear. click Duplicate. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and dimensions. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. To see the details of a particular style. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. tags. 32 To modify a line pattern. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. select it. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate.The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. select it from this list. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 34 Click OK. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. and specify the properties. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and specify the properties. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. name the style. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. angular.

Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 65 Click OK. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. click Format. 62 Click OK. click the arrows between columns. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 53 For Length. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. TIP In the drawing area.47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. For example. click Load. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and choose a decimal symbol. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 64 Review the table. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Modifying Project Settings | 841 . You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and Angle settings. 57 Specify the Slope option. In the Tags dialog. when you add a door with the tag option selected. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Volume. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Medium. and click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 60 Under Walls. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Using the arrows between the columns. 50 To load new annotation tags. The detail level is based on view scale. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 58 Click OK. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. or Fine. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and move view scales as needed. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. 55 Click OK. To move the view scales. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. specify the default location for temporary dimensions.

Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. phase filters. Each command is available on the Settings menu. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. 70 Click the Sheets tab. create new browser organization types. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Use the table below as a checklist. 72 If necessary. furniture. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. In such a case. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Project Phasing on page 767 If necessary. 68 Delete. click the Views tab. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. 69 If necessary. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects.Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. You can find additional information in Help. 73 Click OK. For example. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. or edit existing organization types. and make modifications in each area as necessary. This could be useful for things such as hardware. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. create new browser organization types. or edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. or electrical fixtures. 71 Delete. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you can set up the phases. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. However. In a typical project. rename. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. If necessary. rename. Phases Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 599 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

For example. However. click Door. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. or load a new door type. You can load any family or group into a template. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. click Load. In the steps that follow. and electrical fixtures. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. title blocks. modify. 2 In the Type Selector.Settings Menu Command View Templates Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although the options are endless. or modify a door. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. you do both. there are some important thoughts to consider. and the poche depth. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. you can move onto the next component type. Site Settings If necessary. you could load detail components. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 843. create. do so before starting this exercise. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. or use the Project Browser. notice the list of doors already loaded. the section cut material. or add to this selection. For example. Although this is possible. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695 Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Depending on the intended use of this template. 3 To modify. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. click Bar. Select it. and click Open. If this selection is satisfactory. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 843 . create. you may want to delete. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list.

You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. and click OK. click Edit/New. Make modifications. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. 9 Expand Annotation Symbols. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click OK. Notice that each family category is listed. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Enter a name. and select the title block type.) 10 Expand the title block. In the Element Properties dialog. Click Duplicate. click Edit/New. Modify type properties.Goal: Modify door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Create new door type 4 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. expand Families. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load.

Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Discipline. Detail Level. In this exercise. and click Delete. This title block is currently part of the template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you will first modify view templates. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. load.11 On the Options Bar. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. View Range. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you create the views required for your template. click 12 Click Preview. (Element Properties). and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. In this exercise. To do so. create. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. To load a title block. you created new projects using different templates. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In addition. right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates | 845 . and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. In addition. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 13 Click OK.

there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and double-click Level 1. open the view from the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template.Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 2 Under Names. and click OK. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Black level heads have no associated views. you can apply a view template to any view. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. double-click South. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 11 Click Apply. select Architectural Plan. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. At any time. 4 If necessary. In addition. 18 If you modified any other view templates. double-click Level 2. After applying the template. Notice the level names. under Elevations. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 6 Click OK. select Site Plan. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Site. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 15 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. and apply the appropriate template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

select Make Plan View. click Orient to a Direction. right-click the view name. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. under Floor Plans. To orient the 3D view to another view. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 To add more levels to the template. expand 3D Views. in the Project Browser. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. click Schedule/Quantities. ceiling plans. Rename. notice that you have the option to rename. right-click the ViewCube. review the floor plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. right-click {3D}. 30 In the Project Browser. (Default 3D View). enter a view name. 21 In the Project Browser. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. or delete this view. duplicate. If prompted.20 In the Project Browser. Modifying Views and View Templates | 847 . If it does not display. 22 In the Project Browser. click 29 In the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. click Orient to View. review the existing floor plans. duplicate. a face. right-click the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. use the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. right-click the ViewCube. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and elevations. 27 Create additional levels as needed. You can add schedules to a template. and. 31 Rename the 3D View. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. and select the desired view. right-click Level 1. under 3D Views. on the View toolbar. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. or delete them as needed. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. and click Properties. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Save View. By default. and modify their properties accordingly. click Level. If you want to modify view properties. To orient the 3D view to a direction. and select the desired direction. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. or an edge of the ViewCube.

each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. select the default title block. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. select the title block and delete it. select and order required fields. 848 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . On the Formatting tab. select one. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 40 To add views to the sheet. expand Sheets (all). in the Project Browser. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Select a view. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. click Add View. and click Rename. and click OK. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select the category type. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. assign filters.txt for AutoCAD. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. TIP In the Export Layers dialog. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. After the sheet is created. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 848. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 37 Click OK. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or exportlayersdgn. modify settings as needed. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF.txt for MicroStation). Right-click the sheet name. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed.35 If you want to add schedules to your template. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. To later add a title block to a sheet. click Sheet. To do so. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. You can still add views to the sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Filter tab. and click OK. modify settings as needed. You are prompted to select a title block.

for example. and click Save. Using shared parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 9 Click Save As. You can save these mappings to a text file. and so on. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When scheduling. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and they become the set mappings for the project.2 For each category. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and click Save. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and so on. This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. They cannot be shared with other projects. 8 In the dialog. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. doors. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 255 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 849 . 5 For each category. For example. These settings are retained within the project template. click Save As. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. therefore. name the file. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. name the file. When you create a multi-category schedule. project parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. select Save As. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. project parameters. and click Save. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. name the file. windows.

select a parameter discipline type. enter a parameter name. 24 To add a shared project parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 16 Under Parameter Data. you may want to save the file to a network location. 27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. select a parameter value type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and choose a shared parameter. click New. 26 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. and click OK. 22 Click OK. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 17 Under Discipline. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 850 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 Under Categories. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 19 Under Group parameter under. 8 Under Parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 5 Enter the group name. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. If this template will be used by multiple team members. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. for Name. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 9 Name the parameter.on page 231. select a group to add parameters to. select Project parameter. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. For each parameter group. 3 Name and save the file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 25 Click Select. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. and specify its discipline and type. 10 Click OK. add required parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click Create. click Add. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. click New. If a file already exists. 23 Add project parameters as needed. you can create a list of parameters. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 28 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. under Groups. 14 Click Add.

6 In the New dialog. and make it your default template file. and click OK. 32 Navigate to the directory. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. and click OK. or refer to the online help. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 3 Under Settings. enter a new name for the printer. and create new settings for this printer. Creating Named Print Settings | 851 . you create named print settings. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 4 Modify the printer settings. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. click Save as. Click OK. for Name. By creating named settings within the template.29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 9 In the Print dialog. you can set options such as sheet sizes. For information on creating multi-category tags. 34 For Category. paper placement. click OK. and the percent of actual size. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. save the file as a template. modify the printer settings. 35 For Name. click Setup. make minor modifications if necessary. Create additional settings as needed. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. click Schedule/Quantities. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. select a different printer. 5 Click Save As. For each printer. 2 Under Printer. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click Setup. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. select Multi-Category. By going first to the Print command. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you need only select a setting. select the tag. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. you can load them into the template. The tag is now part of the template. In this exercise. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 37 When you have completed the schedule. and click Open. enter a name for the schedule. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and print. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

10 Repeat these steps as needed. By investing the time to individualize your template. 18 Click Browse. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 25 Click OK. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 19 Select the template. loaded components. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and click Open. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. select it. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. In addition. and click Save. You can also set this template as your default template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and saved them to a template. 23 For Default template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 24 Navigate to the template location. 20 Click OK. click Browse. The only remaining task is to save it. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rte). In this lesson. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you have a project. 14 Under Save as type. In addition. Your template is complete. select Template Files (*. 15 Name the template. you modified settings. 11 Click Close when finished. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. If you need to share this file with others. you ensure that office standards are maintained. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 852 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . save it in a network location. and click Open.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful